Manual Part 2

Engineering & Technical References

Portable PC

BUS
CAN GPS Analog
with standard 20mA
browser as
HMI
RS232
Protection
Embedded
and control LON
Web-Server
MODBUS
REF 542 plus
Ethernet
HMI as Local 8 analog IEC 60870-5-103
Binary I/O
Control Unit inputs for U / I
I/O
U/I
 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A
PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS
REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND
DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. IF THE USER
NEVERTHELESS DETECTS ANY ERRORS, HE IS ASKED TO NOTIFY US AS
SOON AS POSSIBLE.
THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT
OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTERESTS OF OUR CUSTOMERS,
WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED
TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS.
AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES
BETWEEN THE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION
PRODUCT.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 2 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Table of Contents
1 Introduction ..............................................................................................8
2 Abbreviations and Definitions ................................................................9
2.1 Abbreviations ........................................................................................9
2.2 Definitions .............................................................................................9
3 Configuration Software .........................................................................11
3.1 Safety Information ...............................................................................11
3.1.1 Testing the application........................................................11
3.1.2 REF542plus function when importing the application.........11
3.1.3 REF542plus function when exporting the application into the
PC.......................................................................................11
3.2 System requirements ..........................................................................11
3.3 Installation ...........................................................................................12
3.3.1 Installing a new version of the software..............................12
3.3.2 Several software versions on one computer ......................12
3.3.3 Restart after an installation.................................................12
3.4 Starting the configuration software......................................................12
3.5 Using the configuration software .........................................................13
3.5.1 Customer version ...............................................................13
3.5.2 First steps in creating or editing an application ..................13
3.5.3 Working with projects .........................................................13
3.5.4 Selecting the language version ..........................................14
3.5.5 Setting the PC and REF542plus connection ......................15
3.5.6 Configuring the REF542plus ..............................................15
3.5.7 Creating a function chart (FUPLA) .....................................15
3.5.7.1 Add or move function blocks ..............................................16
3.5.7.2 Add or move connection.....................................................17
3.5.7.3 Starting configuration dialogs .............................................18
3.5.7.4 Deleting objects in the function chart..................................19
3.5.7.5 Check function chart...........................................................19
3.5.7.6 Setting the LCD screen and display language ...................20
3.5.8 Description of the menu items ............................................20
3.5.8.1 Main Menu/File ...................................................................20
3.5.8.2 Main menu/Transfer ...........................................................22
3.5.8.3 Main menu/View .................................................................23
3.5.8.4 Main menu/Configure .........................................................23
3.5.8.5 Main menu/Utilities .............................................................26
3.5.8.6 Main menu/Options ............................................................27
3.5.8.7 Main menu/Help .................................................................27

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 3 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

3.5.8.8 Drawing menu/File..............................................................27

3.5.8.9 Drawing menu/Edit .............................................................28
3.5.8.10 Drawing menu/view ............................................................29
3.5.8.11 Drawing menu/Insert ..........................................................30
3.5.8.12 Drawing menu/Utilities........................................................30
3.5.8.13 Drawing menu/options........................................................32
3.5.8.14 Drawing menu/Help ............................................................32
3.6 Uninstall the configuration software ....................................................32
4 Setting up REF542plus..........................................................................33
4.1 Basic information.................................................................................33
4.2 Connecting inputs and outputs............................................................33
4.3 General settings ..................................................................................34
4.3.1 Serial Port...........................................................................34
4.3.2 Global Settings ...................................................................34
4.3.3 Hardware ............................................................................37
4.3.4 Analog inputs......................................................................38
4.3.4.1 Setting the rated network values ........................................40
4.3.4.2 The nominal values of the net and the protection settings .42
4.3.5 Analog outputs....................................................................43
4.3.6 Calculated values ...............................................................45
4.3.7 Display................................................................................46
4.3.7.1 User controls for the editor for the LCD screen ..................47
4.3.7.2 Working with the editor for the LCD screen........................49
4.3.7.3 Configuration dialog for icons .............................................51
4.3.7.4 Configuration dialogue for lines ..........................................52
4.3.8 Display language ................................................................53
4.4 Function and configuration of the function blocks ...............................53
4.4.1 Control panel on HMI Control unit ......................................54
4.4.1.1 Indication LED ....................................................................54
4.4.1.2 Alarm LED ..........................................................................57
4.4.1.3 Alarm Reset........................................................................58
4.4.1.4 LR-Key................................................................................59
4.4.1.5 Emergency Buttons ............................................................59
4.4.1.6 Beeper ................................................................................60
4.4.2 Binary IO (switching objects) ..............................................60
4.4.2.1 Switching object 0-1 ...........................................................65
4.4.2.2 Switching object 0-3 ...........................................................67
4.4.2.3 Switching object 1-0 ...........................................................69
4.4.2.4 Switching object 1-1 ...........................................................71
4.4.2.5 Switching object 1-2 ...........................................................73
4.4.2.6 Switching object 2-1 ...........................................................76
4.4.2.7 Switching object 2-2 ...........................................................79

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 4 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.2.8 Switching object 4-3: Motorcard .........................................85

4.4.2.9 Switching object 6-5: Magnetmotorcard .............................89
4.4.2.10 Switching object 2-2: H bridge Card ...................................92
4.4.2.11 Switching object 4-4 H bridge.............................................99
4.4.2.12 Module for truck (withdrawal unit).....................................106
4.4.2.13 IO-Supervision..................................................................107
4.4.3 Digital logic 1 ....................................................................109
4.4.3.1 Inverter .............................................................................109
4.4.3.2 Constant 1/Constant 0......................................................110
4.4.3.3 AND logic gate with inverted output .................................110
4.4.3.4 AND logic gate with an inverting input..............................111
4.4.3.5 AND logic gate..................................................................111
4.4.3.6 OR logic gate....................................................................112
4.4.3.7 OR logic gate with inverting output...................................113
4.4.4 Digital logic 2 ....................................................................113
4.4.4.1 Exclusive OR logic gate....................................................114
4.4.4.2 Exclusive OR logic gates with inverting output.................115
4.4.5 Flip-Flops..........................................................................115
4.4.5.1 R-S Flip-Flop ....................................................................116
4.4.5.2 R-S flip-flop with timing input (clock) ................................116
4.4.5.3 J-K Flip-Flop .....................................................................117
4.4.5.4 D Flip-Flop ........................................................................118
4.4.5.5 T Flip-Flop ........................................................................119
4.4.5.6 Monoflop retriggerable......................................................119
4.4.5.7 Monoflop non-retriggerable ..............................................120
4.4.5.8 Drop Delay/Rise Delay (slope delay)................................121
4.4.5.9 Counter.............................................................................122
4.4.5.10 Pulse generator ................................................................123
4.4.5.11 Digital Store object ...........................................................124
4.4.6 Analog components..........................................................125
4.4.6.1 Analog Threshold .............................................................125
4.4.6.2 Energy management ........................................................127
4.4.6.3 Energy counter .................................................................128
4.4.6.4 Energy pulse output..........................................................129
4.4.6.5 LON sensor (not support) .................................................131
4.4.6.6 Power Factor Controller....................................................131
4.4.7 General Information on protection functions.....................139
4.4.8 Current Protection ............................................................140
4.4.8.1 Inrush................................................................................140
4.4.8.2 Overcurrent directional high .............................................141
4.4.8.3 Overcurrent directional low...............................................143
4.4.8.4 Overcurrent instantaneous ...............................................145
4.4.8.5 Overcurrent high...............................................................147
4.4.8.6 Overcurrent low ................................................................148

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 5 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.8.7 IDMT.................................................................................150
4.4.8.8 Earth fault high .................................................................151
4.4.8.9 Earthfault low....................................................................153
4.4.8.10 Earthfault directional high .................................................154
4.4.8.11 Earthfault directional low ..................................................156
4.4.8.12 Earthfault directional sensitive..........................................158
4.4.8.13 Earthfault IDMT ................................................................160
4.4.9 Voltage Protection ............................................................162
4.4.9.1 Overvoltage instantaneous...............................................162
4.4.9.2 Overvoltage high ..............................................................164
4.4.9.3 Overvoltage low................................................................165
4.4.9.4 Undervoltage instantaneous.............................................167
4.4.9.5 Undervoltage high ............................................................168
4.4.9.6 Undervoltage low..............................................................170
4.4.9.7 Residual overvoltage high ................................................171
4.4.9.8 Residual overvoltage low..................................................173
4.4.10 Motor Protection ...............................................................174
4.4.11 Thermal overload protection.............................................174
4.4.12 Motor start ........................................................................177
4.4.13 Blocking rotor....................................................................178
4.4.14 Number of starts ...............................................................180
4.4.15 Distance protection...........................................................182
4.4.16 Differential Protection .......................................................197
4.4.17 Other functions .................................................................202
4.4.17.1 Thermal supervision .........................................................202
4.4.17.2 Unbalanced load...............................................................202
4.4.17.3 Directional power..............................................................206
4.4.17.4 Low load ...........................................................................208
4.4.17.5 Frequency supervision .....................................................209
4.4.17.6 Synchrocheck ...................................................................211
4.4.18 Fault recorder ...................................................................213
4.4.19 Communication objects ....................................................215
4.4.19.1 Binary Write ......................................................................215
4.4.19.2 16-Bit Write.......................................................................217
4.4.19.3 Binary Read......................................................................219
4.4.19.4 16-Bit Read.......................................................................221
4.4.19.5 Direct read-write ...............................................................223
4.4.19.6 Event generator ................................................................226
4.4.19.7 Bay Reserve .....................................................................228
4.4.19.8 Switch Authority Allocation ...............................................232
4.4.20 Miscallaneous objects ......................................................234
4.4.20.1 Operating hours................................................................234
5 Technical data ......................................................................................236

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 6 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

5.1 Analog input channels .......................................................................236

5.1.1 With current and voltage transformer: ..............................236
5.1.2 With current and voltage sensor.......................................236
5.2 Binary inputs and outputs..................................................................236
5.2.1 With mechanical relays.....................................................236
5.2.2 With static outputs ............................................................237
5.3 Interface ............................................................................................237
5.3.1 HMI Control Unit ...............................................................237
5.3.2 Central Unit:......................................................................237
5.4 Analog output board (optional)..........................................................237
5.5 Communication (optional) .................................................................237
5.6 Power supply.....................................................................................238
5.6.1 Central Unit.......................................................................238
5.6.2 HMI Control Unit ...............................................................238
5.7 Temperature range ...........................................................................238
5.8 Degree of protection..........................................................................238
5.8.1 Central Unit.......................................................................238
5.8.2 HMI Control Unit ...............................................................238
6 Type test ...............................................................................................239
6.1 EMC ..................................................................................................239
6.2 Insulation...........................................................................................239
6.3 Mechanical robustness .....................................................................239
6.4 Climatic conditions ............................................................................239
7 Connection Diagram............................................................................240
7.1 Connector Plate ................................................................................240
7.2 HMI....................................................................................................241
7.3 REF542plus with mechanical binary I/O ...........................................242
7.4 REF542plus with solid state binary I/O .............................................245

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 7 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

1 Introduction
This part of the handbook describes the usage of the configuration software to define
the configuration file to be downloaded to the REF542plus in order to realize the
protection and control as well as communication to the station automation system.
The configuration file consists particularly of the Functionsblock programming
language (FUPLA). The following section and its subsections contain information on:
Configuration software
Set up of the REF542plus
Configuration of the function blocks

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 8 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

2 Abbreviations and Definitions

2.1 Abbreviations
AR AutoReclosure
CT Current Transformer
DFT Discrete Fourier Tansformation
FUPLA FUnktionblock Programming LAnguage also used as abbreviation for
function plan or chart
HMI Human Machine Interface as control unit
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LAG Lon Application Guide
MC MicroController
PC Personal Computer
RHMI Remote Human Machine Interface, the same meaning as HMI
VDEW Association of German Utilities

2.2 Definitions
There are notes and warnings on hazards at the beginning of every section and also
in the text. They are in a different font to distinguish them from normal text.
The safety warnings must be observed in all circumstances. If they are not observed,
no guarantee claims will be accepted.

Note
A note indicates items that are significant in the specific context. A note may contain
information on the interplay of various software components and appears as shown
below.
Example:

Note Please read this section completely for information on the various formats for
safety notes.

Hazard information level 1

Level 1 hazard information indicates hazards affecting substations and devices. It
should always be observed, because otherwise function interruptions or malfunctions
may occur. An example is shown below:

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 9 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Caution Do not make any changes to the FUPLA unless you are familiar with the
REF542plus and the configuration software

Hazard information level 2

Level 2 hazard information indicates hazards affecting life and limb. It must be
observed to avoid injury to the operator or other personnel.
Example:

Warning! Never attempt to remove the protection covers on the busbars by force.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 10 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

3 Configuration Software
In this section you will find the following information:
How to install the configuration software onto your PC
How to start the configuration software
The basic steps in creating or editing a function chart, that is the FUPLA
The individual menu items of the configuration software
How to uninstall the configuration software from the computer.

3.1 Safety Information

3.1.1 Testing the application

Warning! Every application must undergo a function test with the bay for which it
was created. The protection functions must be thoroughly checked in
this test!

3.1.2 REF542plus function when importing the application

Warning! As much as possible, avoid loading an application into the REF542plus

when the bay is operating. The bay control and protection unit is out of
commission while an application is being loaded from a PC into the
REF542plus.

3.1.3 REF542plus function when exporting the application into the PC

Note If the application is exported from the REF542plus into a PC while the unit is
operating, the REF542plus functions are not affected. However, local control
is not possible during this period.

3.2 System requirements

IBM compatible personal computer, Intel Pentium processor
min. 32 MB RAM
3.5 “ disk drive
Mouse
Microsoft Windows® NT 4.0
Hard drive space: 5 MB free

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 11 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

3.3 Installation
The REF542plus configuration software installation is controlled by a menu in the
Microsoft Windows® NT operating system. To start the installation software, please
proceed as follows:
Start your Microsoft Windows® NT Version.
Insert the installation disk.
Display the disk contents in the Explorer.
Start the file setup.exe (e.g. double-click the left mouse button when the mouse
cursor is over the file) on the diskette. Help can be found in the Microsoft
Windows® online help or the manuals.
The installation software, when started, initially offers a choice of the language
(English or German) used to guide the user through the installation process. Please
follow the instructions and observe the information provided by the installation
program.
Every step in the installation process can be reversed or the entire program can be
cancelled. If the installation has been cancelled, any previously installed files should
be deleted from the directory where they were installed.

3.3.1 Installing a new version of the software

Note First uninstall the program if you intend to retain the target directory or group
names of an older installation.

3.3.2 Several software versions on one computer

Note Windows should be restarted between starting different software versions to

avoid problems with previously installed DLLs.

3.3.3 Restart after an installation

Note At the end of the installation you are prompted to decide whether Windows
should be restarted. This is recommended if a different version of the
configuration program has been run since the last time Windows was started.

3.4 Starting the configuration software

After the installation has been completed as described above, the software can be
started as follows:

The program groups here are accessed through the Start button. After starting
Microsoft Windows® NT this button can be found at the lower left side of the screen.
The program group with the REF542plus configuration software will be found in the

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 12 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

opened menu or in one of the following submenus. Additional information can be

found in Microsoft Windows® online help or in the manuals.

3.5 Using the configuration software

The following subsections provide basic information on using the configuration
software. The most important activities in creating or editing an application are
described.
Another section explains the menu items in the main menu and the character menu in
the sequence in which they appear.

Note The limitations of the customer version that are described below are not
explained any further in the configuration software documentation.

3.5.1 Customer version

The customer version of the configuration software has the following limitations:
Additional protection functions cannot be added to your application. If a protection
function in the application is deleted, it cannot be added again later.
You cannot save your application under another name.
(The menu item Save as… cannot be selected).

The device address of the REF542plus cannot be changed.

3.5.2 First steps in creating or editing an application

Not all functions of the configuration software are described in the following section. It
is intended to introduce only the basic functions. While working with the configuration
software you will certainly learn additional functions. All menu items in the
configuration software are also described in a separate section.
The sequence of the following subsection corresponds to the sequence of steps
required when defining a new application. When an existing application is opened, all
basic settings are of course already specified. The function chart is also complete.
However, the procedure for editing an application is the same as for creating it. Some
steps are explained in more detail at other points in the documentation.

3.5.3 Working with projects

The set of files that belong to an application in connection with the configuration
software is referred to as the project. Projects can be created, opened and saved in
the configuration software. After starting the configuration software, a new project with
the name new.ref is created.

Note When saving a new project for the first time, always select the menu item
Main Menu/File/Save as F7. Otherwise the name "new.ref" will be
retained.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 13 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The table on the next page describes the set of files associated with a project. Not all
of them will be created in every application. In addition, the table shows when the files
are created or updated. If the files shall be created, the corresponding menu
„Generate Report File“ must be activated.

Table 1:
File Contents Created Updated
*.ref Application comprising: When saving When saving
- Drawing
- Parameter
- Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) configuration
- LCD texts
All other files can be recreated from this file, with
the exception of the fault records files
*.bak Application back-up file When opening When opening
*.doc - Device configuration When opening When opening
- Rated values of the analog inputs
- Configured protection functions with setting values
*.wir All connections in use are counted and the When opening When opening
connection number and the associated text is given.
The connections are sorted by the object number to
which they are connected and by the number of the
connector pin. As well as the object number, the
object type to which the connection is connected is
also written to this file.
*.lst All events generated by the application are listed When opening When opening
here.
*.lcu The mimic diagram configuration of the current When exporting When exporting
application. a mimic diagram a mimic diagram
*.ri1 The setting parameter set 1 of the impedance When saving an When saving an
protection. The Omicron test set uses this file for application with application with
automatic testing. distance distance
protection protection
*.ri2 The setting parameter set 2 of the When saving an When saving an
impedance protection. The Omicron test application with application with
distance distance
set uses this file for automatic testing. protection protection
*.cfg Configuration file for the fault recorder When exporting
module. a fault record

*.dat Fault record file with the recorded data. When exporting
a fault record

Only files with the names *.ref can be opened directly in the configuration software.
There is a set of files describing the functioning of the REF542plus for every item of
equipment or bay that requires monitoring.

3.5.4 Selecting the language version

To have the menu bars, dialogs and messages of the configuration software appear
in the desired language, select the menu item Main Menu/Options/Language/
[English, German, Italian]. Because the English version appears first after

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 14 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

installing the software, please select the menu item Main Menu/Options/
Language/[English, German, Italian]. The desired language version will be
marked in the menu and set immediately. This setting is also retained after closing
the software.

3.5.5 Setting the PC and REF542plus connection

To import the completed application from the PC to the REF542plus or to export an
application or other data from the REF542plus, the connection must be established
first. Therefore a special cable must be applied. One end is plugged in to the optical
interface of the HMI control Unit on the REF542plus control panel. The other end is
plugged into the serial RS232 interface of the PC.

To enable data to be transferred over this connection, the dialog Main

Menu/Transfer/Serial Port must be started in the configuration software.

Note Ensure that the parameters of the dialog Serial Interface … as set in
the configuration software also conform to the parameters for the serial
interface, which can be configured in the operating system.

3.5.6 Configuring the REF542plus

To be able to configure an application at all, the equipment installed in the
REF542plus must be entered into the configuration software. To do this, start the
dialog window Main Menu/Configure/Global Settings and Main Menu/
Configure/Hardware.

The analog inputs and outputs should be defined before making the application
settings. Start the dialog window Main
Menu/Configure/Terminals/Analog Inputs and if necessary Main
Menu/Configure/Terminals/Analog Outputs. If an analog output board is
not used, this menu item cannot be selected.

After defining the analog inputs, the dialog Main Menu/Configure/Calcula-

ted Values may also be selected.

It is best not to define the settings for the display unit and the display language
until the function chart has been created.

3.5.7 Creating a function chart (FUPLA)

To create the function chart, start the function chart editor with the menu item Main
Menu/Configure/Drawing.

Note Before the function chart editor can be started, make the settings for a new
application in the configuration dialogs Main Menu/Configure/Global
Settings and Main Menu/Configure/Hardware.

The first page of the application will appear. To make an application more
manageable, it can be distributed over several pages. One page is larger than the PC

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 15 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

screen. All areas of the current page can be viewed by using the scroll bars to the
right and at the bottom of the drawing editor window. The arrow keys (cursor keys) on
the keyboard can also be used for this.

3.5.7.1 Add or move function blocks

Function blocks can be added and moved in the working mode.

Add function block

Select Drawing Menu/Insert. A submenu with various function groups appears.
Selecting a function group brings up another submenu listing the individual function
blocks. The selected function block is placed on the top left of the page.

Example: Select Drawing Menu/Insert/Control Panel/Indication LED to

select the indication LED function block.

Move function block

To move, hold the left mouse button down when the cursor is on the function block
and drag it with the mouse.

Restrictions
Note that not all function blocks can be combined with one another.
There are also additional restrictions for function blocks and connections, which are
listed in the table below.

Table 2: Restrictions in the FUPLA

Function block Restrictions
Protection functions Max. 12 protection functions
Max. 120 protection parameters
100% DSP load
Fault recorder Max. 1 fault recorder and
Min. 1 configured protection function
Cycle time of application Max. 30 ms
Memory object Max. 1
Power counter Max. 15
Switching object Max. 62
Threshold object Max. 10 per analog input
Direct write-read command Max. 100
Connections Max. 560, number of connections 502
Signaling LED's Max. 32 on 4 sides of 8 LED's each

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 16 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Determining the cycle time

Note Once a new application has been created and loaded into the REF542plus,
its cycle time must be checked. The cyclic time is displayed on the menu
Service page, submenu Statistics.

Warning! The cycle time of an application must be less than 30 ms to ensure

proper functioning of the REF542plus.

3.5.7.2 Add or move connection

To link the function blocks with one another, switch to drawing mode. Then
position the mouse cursor over a connection point on a function block or at
the beginning or end point of a connection. The mouse cursor will change to
the shape of a soldering iron.
A total of 512 connections can be added. There are 502 numbers available for
connections (11 … 512). Connection numbers 0 … 10 are for internal use.
Add connection
When the soldering iron appears, hold the right mouse button down and drag
the mouse to make a connection. The connection will end when the mouse
button is released.
The terminals of two function blocks can be connected in this way. The
connection can also end in the FUPLA without connecting to a terminal. The
connection number is automatically 1 or 2 in this case to indicate that it does
not connect two function blocks. Now use the configuration dialog to assign a
previously used connection number to the connection. Connections with the
same connection number are considered to be connected even if they do not
contact each other.
Connections run at right angles or in a straight line (therefore, also
diagonally), depending on their setting. The relevant setting is made with the
menu item Drawing Menu/ View/Wires/Right-angled
Or
Drawing Menu/View/Wires/Straight.
Move connections
When the soldering iron appears, hold the left mouse button down and drag
the mouse to move a connection point. When the mouse button is released,
the connection point will remain at this position.

Note When a connection point is dragged or moved from one function block
terminal to another function block terminal, ensure that the connection is
properly positioned at the function block.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 17 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Check connections after a move

There are two options for carrying out the above check:
Move the mouse pointer over the connection wire. Double-click the left mouse
button to start the configuration dialog for the wire. The terminal information area
shows the number of the wire that is properly terminated. The numbers 11 and 12
indicate that there is still no connection.
OR
Move the function block in the FUPLA. If the connections are moved with it, the
connection is correct.

3.5.7.3 Starting configuration dialogs

A dialog window can be opened for all function blocks and connections. To start it,
move the mouse cursor over the function block or the wire. The configuration dialog
appears after double-clicking the left mouse button.

Configuration dialog function block

As shown in Figure 1, this enables the function block to be configured and/or provides
information on the terminated connections.

Configuration dialogue connection

Figure 1: Configuration dialogue for a connection

Enter field Net number: Enter the wire connection number here. The currently
assigned connection number will appear, a 1 or a 2. The numbers 1 or 2 only appear
when the connection ends with a terminal point in the FUPLA. To find the currently
assigned connection number, the configuration software searches the connection
numbers from 11 upwards for a free connection.
The connection number is also shown in the function chart beside the connection.
Setting range: 11 … 512 (Steps: 1)
Default: Currently assigned connection, 1 or 2

Information field Next unused net number: The next free connection is assigned
here. The configuration software searches the connection numbers from 11 upwards
for a free connection.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 18 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field Maximum Number of Wires: This shows the maximum possible
number of connections in the current function chart. A total of 560 connections can be
used. There are 502 connection numbers available.

Information field used: This shows how many connections are already set up in the
function chart.

Input field Comment: Enter a comment, a name, for the connection here. The name
will also appear in the function chart beside the connection. This name will be
assigned to all connections with the same connection number.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters of the standard character set
Default: Empty

Button Choose next free: Click on this button to assign the next free connection
number to the connection. The dialog window is then closed, and the connection has
the corresponding number.
OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is closed.
Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

3.5.7.4 Deleting objects in the function chart

Various options are available here:
Delete a function block: Move the mouse pointer over the function block that is to
be deleted. Double-click the right mouse button.
A confirmation query appears. Click the OK button to delete the function block or
Cancel to retain the function block.

Delete a connection: Move the mouse pointer over the connection which is to be
deleted. Double-click the right mouse button.
A confirmation query appears. Click the OK button to delete the connection or
Cancel to retain the connection.

Delete the current page: Select the menu Draw Mode/Edit/Delete Page. A
confirmation query appears. Click the OK button to delete the page or Cancel to
retain the page.

Delete all connections in the application: Select the menu Draw Mode/Edit/
Delete All/Wires. A confirmation query appears. Click the OK button to
delete the connections or Cancel to retain the connections.

Deleting all pages in the application: Select the menu Draw Mode/Edit/Dele-
te All/Pages. A confirmation query appears. Click the OK button to delete the
pages or Cancel to retain the pages.

3.5.7.5 Check function chart

The function chart can be checked both in draw mode and connection mode:
Press the F9 function key on the keyboard or

Select the menu item Drawing Menu/Utilities/Check Drawing F9 or

Select the menu item Main Menu/Utilities/Check Drawing F9

The check routine of the configuration software runs the following tests:

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 19 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Binary inputs and outputs: Availability of the numbers of the binary inputs and
outputs used in the application. The availability depends on the number and type
of binary input and output boards in use.
Device configuration: Availability of a device configuration. Has the configuration
dialog in the menu item Main Menu/Configure/Hardware been processed?
AR and circuit-breaker: If the automatic restart has been configured, there must
be a circuit-breaker in the application.
Function blocks: All function blocks must be linked to at least one connection.
DSP load: The DSP load (load on the protection and measuring unit) can be a
maximum of 100%, a maximum of 120 protection parameters can be used and a
maximum of 12 protection functions can be used.
Connections: The number of connections must not exceed 512.
Double connections: Connections with the same number may only be connected
to one function block output.
Calculation of power: The configuration of the analog inputs must match the type
of power calculation.
Switching objects: A maximum of 62 switching objects may be configured.
Every switching object must have its own interbay bus address and binary output
represented by the switching object must be physically present.
Direct write-read command: A maximum of 100 such function blocks are
permitted.

3.5.7.6 Setting the LCD screen and display language

When the application has been set up, the mimic diagram for the LCD screen may be
configured and the language in which the messages appear on the LCD screen
selected. Select the menu items Main Menu/Configure/Display and Main
Menu/Configure/Display Language.

3.5.8 Description of the menu items

The following subsections provide a description of all menu items of the configuration
software. They are subdivided into main and drawing menu.
The main menu is displayed after starting the configuration software. The drawing
menu is displayed when the menu item Main Menu/Configure/Drawing has
been selected in the main menu.

3.5.8.1 Main Menu/File

New
A new project under the name new.ref is created. Save it immediately under a
different name, because this name is always reserved for new projects.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 20 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Open… F2
A standard operating system dialog window for opening a file opens. The default file
ending for the file format is ref. If necessary, move through the disk and directory
structure to open a configuration file.
The dialog for opening the file will also appear when the F2 key on the PC keyboard
is pressed.
After the project has been opened, a drawing check is run. Any error messages must
first be acknowledged before the project can be edited.

Save F6
The open application file is saved. If a new application file has been created, the file
new.ref will be saved in the default work directory of the configuration software. In
the case of a new file, use the menu item Save as … when it is saved for the first
time.
An application can also be saved by pressing the F6 function key on the PC
keyboard.

Note Before saving, the configuration software runs a check of the application. Any
messages that appear must be acknowledged before saving.

Save as… F7
A standard operating system dialog window for saving a file appears. The file can be
given any desired name and location. The default file ending for the file format is ref.

The dialog can also be started by pressing the F6 function key on the PC keyboard.

Note Before saving the configuration software runs a check of the application. Any
messages that appear must be acknowledged before saving.

Send E-Mail...
Calls the standard E-Mail software and put the currently opened edt-file of the
configuration software as attachment.

Print
Another submenu is opened here where the information that is to be printed can be
selected. A dialog window appears. Its appearance depends on the operating system
and the installed printer. Additional inputs regarding the print process can be made
here.
Drawing
The function chart is printed out, on several pages if necessary.
Parameters
A file is printed with a list of all the parameters input in the application sorted by
their origin. For example, this includes the device settings and also the parameter
sets for the protection functions.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 21 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Eventlist
A file that lists all possible events that could be generated by the application is
printed out. They are sorted by the function block that generated them.
Connections
The connection numbers and the associated comments are printed out in list
form.
Print All
When this menu item is selected, all previously described printable information is
printed out in sequence.

Print Set Up
When the configuration program is installed, the default printer is activated initially. If
required, another printer can be directly selected and defined as the default printer.

Print Preview
Not applicable for the time being.

3.5.8.2 Main menu/Transfer

Serial Port
Starts the configuration dialog for the connection from the PC to the REF542plus via
the serial port.

Send to REF542plus
Sends the data from the open application to the REF542plus.

Load from REF542plus

Exports the application currently in the REF542plus from the unit.

Read Faultrecorder…
Exports the fault record data saved in the REF542plus when the New Data button is
pressed in the dialog window.
The data can be saved. If the MVB is being used as the interbay bus, the data will
include the current time and date.

Input Status…
Exports the current status of the binary inputs of the first two input/output boards of
the REF542plus when the New Data button is pressed in the dialog window. The
data are marked with the current PC system date and time and can be saved and
printed.

Output Status…
Exports the current status of the binary outputs of the first two input/output boards of
the REF542plus when the New Data button is pressed in the dialog window. The
data is marked with the current PC system date and time and can be saved and
printed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 22 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Measurement…
Exports the current status of the operational measured values from the REF542plus.
These are certain values that can also be displayed in the LC display screen above
the mimic diagram.
The continuous measured value transmission to the PC can be configured in the
operational measured values dialog window. The operational measured values and, if
desired, the values from the binary inputs and outputs, will then be regularly
transmitted from the REF542plus to the PC.
The data is marked with the current PC system date and time and can be saved and
printed.

Condition Monitoring
Not applicable for the time being.

Key Code
Not applicable for the time being.
Set protection key
Not applicable for the time being.
Set control key
Not applicable for the time being.

Exit Application
Ends the session of the configuration software „REF542CONF“

Version
Reads the current versions of the REF542plus microcontrollers (MC) and the
configuration software. The information is displayed in a dialogue window. If a
connection to the REF542plus cannot be established, an error message will be
shown.

3.5.8.3 Main menu/View

Toolbar
Opens the tool bar on the top side of the configuration software

Status Bar
Sets the status bar at the bottom of the configuration software

Transfer Bar
Opens the transfer bar below the toolbar

3.5.8.4 Main menu/Configure

Global Settings…
Starts a configuration dialog in which the basic settings are made. Functions such as
fault monitoring, coil monitoring and default values such as the general filter time and

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 23 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

the device address are defined here. In addition, the system messages (events),
which can be sent from the system itself to a station control system, can be
configured in two other dialogs.

Note This configuration dialog must be edited before an application can be created.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 24 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Hardware...
Starts a configuration dialog in which settings that describe the delivery variations of
the REF542plus can be made.

Note This configuration dialog must be edited before an application can be created.

Terminals
This menu item enables the selection of two submenu items. With them the analog
inputs and outputs can be configured. Correct configuration of the analog inputs in
particular is extremely important if the REF542plus is to function properly.

Analog Inputs...
Starts a configuration dialog in which settings can be made to adapt the analog inputs
of the REF542plus to the sensors or transducers used. Information important for
starting and tripping protection functions is sent to the bay control and protection unit
via these inputs. Measured values are also recorded with these sensors or
transducers.

Note The same measurement recorders are used for the protection and the
measurement functions.

Analog Outputs...
Starts a configuration dialog in which settings that influence the REF542plus analog
outputs can be made. The operational measured values that must be output are
selected and the dynamic range of the output signal can be influenced.

Calculated Values…
Starts a configuration dialog in which settings for the calculated quantities are made.
This includes items such as the selection of the metering system and the type of
power calculation.

Component
Not applicable for the time being

Drawing
Starts the function chart editor. Function blocks can be added, connected and
configured here to set the desired functions for the bay control and protection unit.
The menu bar with the drawing menu appears. The menu items of the drawing menu
will be described later.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 25 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Display…
Starts the editor for the LCD screen. The mimic diagram can be set up here. Its
elements are connected to the corresponding function blocks.

Display Language…
Starts the dialog that sets the language version for the texts displayed on the LCD
screen. At the same time the correct message texts for the application are selected.

LED Bars...
Assigns the display of the measurement values to the LED-bars according to the
following configuration dialog.

Figure 2: Configuration dialog to assign the measurement values of the LED bars

3.5.8.5 Main menu/Utilities

Check Drawing F9
Starts the software routine that checks the drawing according to specific criteria. If
necessary, relevant error messages appear after the check.

Generate Report Files

Creates report file of the currently opened configuration file

Protection Functions...
Lists all protection function configured. The configuration dialog for the setting
parameter can be opened by double clicking the desired protection function

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 26 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

3.5.8.6 Main menu/Options

Language
Only one more submenu needs be selected to select the language version of the
configuration software. All menu items, dialogs and messages will then appear in the
selected language. This setting is retained every time the software is started in future.

3.5.8.7 Main menu/Help

Function Keys F1
Opens an information window that shows the assignment of the function keys on the
PC keyboard. The appropriate function key is also shown with the corresponding
menu items.
The following table shows the assignment of the function keys in the main menu and
in the drawing menu.

Table 3: Assignment of the function keys

Key Main Menu Drawing Menu
F1 Help on function keys Information dialog function keys
F2 Information dialog function keys -
F3 - Wire mode: Connect FUPLA symbols
F4 - Draw mode: Move FUPLA symbols
F5 - Refresh drawing (screen refresh)
F6 Save Save
F7 Save as… -
F8 - Repeat last add action (only for logic
symbols)
F9 Check Drawing Check Drawing
F10 - Sequences ON/OFF
F11
F12 FUPLA Monitor

About…
Opens an information window with copyright and version information of the
configuration software.

3.5.8.8 Drawing menu/File

Save F6
The open application file is saved. If a new application file has been created, the file
new.ref will be saved in the default work directory of the configuration software. In

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 27 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

the case of a new file, use the menu item Save as … when it is saved for the first
time.
A project can also be saved by pressing the F6 function key on the PC keyboard.

Note Before saving, the configuration software runs a check of the application. Any
messages that appear must be acknowledged before saving.

Exit Edit
The editor used to create and edit the function chart is closed. The function chart
display disappears and the main menu menu bar appears again.

3.5.8.9 Drawing menu/Edit

Insert Page…
Starts a dialog with which a page can be added. The number of the page is entered in
the input field before an empty page is added. An information window shows the last
page that has been used in the application.
The Accept and Cancel buttons are used to add the page or to cancel the
procedure. The dialog window is closed and the user is returned to the drawing menu.
The configuration software provides a maximum of 99 pages for one application.

Delete Page…
Starts a dialog with which the current page can be deleted. The Accept and Cancel
buttons are used to delete the page or to cancel the procedure. The dialog window is
closed and the user is returned to the drawing menu.

Delete All
This menu item has two submenu items. They provide the option of deleting all
connections or all pages.

After making the selection, a confirmation window appears. Click the OK button to
confirm the deletion or Cancel to delete nothing. The dialog window is closed and
the user is returned to the drawing menu.

Domain
Not applicable for the time being

Search Wire…
Opens a dialog window where all connections with the same number can be found.
The connection number is entered into the appropriate input field.

The OK button closes the dialog window and the connections with the number input
are marked red on all pages of the function chart.

The Cancel button closes the dialog window and returns the user to the drawing
menu.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 28 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Search Object…
This menu item has two submenu items. They enable a function block (referred to as
an object here) to be searched either by its interbay bus address or its object number.
A dialog window appears after making the selection. The interbay bus address or the
object number can be entered into the input field.

The OK button closes the dialog window and the object with the interbay bus address
or the object number that was entered is displayed in the function chart.

The Cancel button closes the dialog window and returns the user to the drawing
menu.

3.5.8.10 Drawing menu/view

Toolbar
Opens the tool bar on the top side of the configuration software

Status Bar
Sets the status bar at the bottom of the configuration software

Sequences F10
This menu item shows and hides all labels on the function blocks and connections.
The F10 function key on the PC keyboard does the same thing.

Wires
This menu item has two submenu items. This enables the user to select whether con-
nections can run only at right angles (perpendicular and horizontal) or in straight lines
(perpendicular, horizontal and diagonal).
This setting may be changed at any time and affects all connections.

Next page PgDn

Shows the next page in the function chart. The PgDn (Page Down) key or Screen↓ on
the PC keyboard does the same thing.

Previous page PgUp

Shows the previous page in the function chart. The PgUp (Page Up) key or Screen↑
on the PC keyboard does the same thing.

Go to page...
Starts a dialog with which any page of the function chart can be displayed. The
number of the page required is entered into the input field. An information window
shows the last page that has been used in the application.
The OK and Cancel buttons show the page or cancel the procedure. The dialog
window is closed and the user is returned to the drawing menu.
The configuration software provides a maximum of 99 pages for one application.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 29 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Zoom…
Opens a dialog window with which the page view can be enlarged. The percentage
factor is entered into the appropriate input field. It is always based on the default size
of 100%.

Redraw F5
Refreshes the display on the screen. The size and the markings of searched objects
remain as before.

Reset
Removes the markings on searched objects and resets the size to the default factor
of 100%. Page 1 of the application also appears.

3.5.8.11 Drawing menu/Insert

A menu with all possible function blocks arranged by function groups appears. The
various submenus are used to select the corresponding function blocks. The selected
one is then added to the function chart.
There, the sequence of descriptions corresponds to the menu structure of the
Insert menu described here. Therefore, a list of the function groups with their
function blocks is not given here.

3.5.8.12 Drawing menu/Utilities

Check drawing F9
Starts the software routine for checking the drawing according to specific points. If
necessary, relevant error messages appear after the check.

FUPLA Monitor F12

This menu item can be marked by selecting it. A < > then appears beside the menu
item. If also the special cable for the optical – RS 232 interface for the communication
between the PC with the HMI Control Unit is connected, the logical level of the
connection in the FUPLA can be shown on line.

Switching objects…
An information dialog appears. It lists the interbay bus addresses available for the
switching objects. Additional information is also shown adjacently:
----------: The interbay bus address is not used by a switching object.

“EXAMPLE TEXT“:Text from the Comment input field in the configuration dialog
of the switching object.
“empty“: The interbay bus address is used by a switching object. However, no
comment text has been entered.

Note When the mouse cursor is placed over a line with the data of a switching
object and the left mouse button is double-clicked, the dialog is closed and
the switching object is marked in the function chart.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 30 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Protection functions…
The dialog window shown below appears. It lists the protection functions in the
application.

Figure 3: Dialog drawing menu/Utilities/protection functions…

A protection function can be marked with the option fields. If the Search button is
clicked, the dialog window is closed and the protection function (of the function block)
is marked in the FUPLA.

The DSP load information field shows the percentage load on the protection and
measurement unit (DSP: digital signal processor) resulting from the configured
protection functions. A maximum of 100% is permitted. No more than 120 protection
parameters and 12 protection functions may be used simultaneously.

The Close button ends the dialog.

Wires…
An information dialog with the numbers of the connections in use opens. The number
of connections with this number is shown adjacently in parentheses. At the end the
text that was entered into the comment field of the configuration dialog of the
connection follows.

Note When the mouse cursor is placed over a line with the data of a connection
and the left mouse button is double-clicked, the dialog is closed and all
relevant connections are marked in the function chart.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 31 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

3.5.8.13 Drawing menu/options

Block Moving of Objects

This menu item can be marked by selecting it. A < > then appears beside the menu
item. The function blocks in drawing mode are moved only when the Shift key is held
down.

Move Objects Transparently

If this menu item is marked, the white colored area of the function blocks becomes
transparent when it is moved.

FUPLA Monitor
The color of the logical high and low level can be defined.
Line Color High Level
The line color for locical high level can be selected
Line Color Low Level
The line color for locical low level can be selected

3.5.8.14 Drawing menu/Help

Function keys F1
Opens an information window that shows the assignment of the function keys on the
PC keyboard. The function keys are also shown with the corresponding menu items.

‚About…
Opens an information window with copyright and version information of the
configuration software.

3.6 Uninstall the configuration software

In Windows NT 4.0 start the uninstall process with Start/Configure/System
Settings/Software.

With the user-defined uninstall process note that a directory is always deleted, even if
it is not empty. This may accidentally delete files.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 32 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4 Setting up REF542plus
In this chapter you will find the following information:
On the options for adding required functions to your bay control and protection
device.
On the settings that can be made in the configuration software to adapt the
REF542plus to the application.
On configuring the function plan (FUPLA) to the bay in which the unit is operating.
On implementing the protection functions by using the related function blocks.
On all other function blocks that can be added to the FUPLA.
If the unit has been delivered with a custom application, this section will assist in
understanding the function blocks with respect to their function and configuration.

4.1 Basic information

The variety of functions offered by the REF542plus results mainly from the PLC-like
programming option provided by the configuration software. Various function blocks
are linked to one another in one FUPLA.
The objects that can be added to the function chart are referred to as function blocks.
They are used to address binary and analog inputs and outputs and to define
switching operations, interlocking and protection functions.
Each function block has inputs and/or outputs that can be used within the FUPLA.
Double-click the left mouse button to open the configuration dialog of the function
block on which the mouse cursor is resting.
Normally a configuration or application has been created to be precisely customized
for the purpose and location of the REF542plus switchbay control and protection
device. This configuration has been loaded into the REF542plus and saved there. It
specifies what protection functions are tripped under what conditions, when and what
interlockings are activated and what initial variables are set for the analog and binary
outputs of the REF542plus. The application implemented with the FUPLA provides
exactly the protection, measurement, supervision and control functions that are
required.

4.2 Connecting inputs and outputs

The REF542plus receives a great variety of information on the equipment being
monitored through its analog and binary inputs. These input quantities are digitally
processed in the function chart. The REF542plus outputs are addressed from the
FUPLA, for example to trip the switching objects in the bay.
To enable the REF542plus inputs and outputs to be used in the function chart, they
are represented by function blocks, the switching objects. This enables several inputs
and outputs to be combined.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 33 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.3 General settings

Before a FUPLA can be created and exported to the REF542plus, some settings
must be made in the PC and the bay control and protection unit for which the
application is to be programmed.

4.3.1 Serial Port

To enable the Serial Port (RS232) of the computer to be used to transmit the
configuration/application, the applicable dialog window must be edited. After starting
the configuration software, open the menu Main Menu/Transfer/Serial Port .
The dialog window has five option fields where settings for the computer Serial Port
can be made.

Configuration dialog
Option field ComPort: Here enter the active interface on the computer to enable
communication from the PC to the REF542plus over a special serial optical cable.
Setting range: [COM1, COM2]
Default: COM 1

Note The following options are set.

Option field BaudRate:
Default: 9600
Option field Parity:
Default: None
Option field Data BITS:
Default: 8
Option field Stop BITS:
Default: 1

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.2 Global Settings

The "Global Settings" dialog window is to be opened with the menu Main
Menu/Configure/Global Settings . The desired general configuration inputs
are made here. With the exception of those for trip circuit supervision, the inputs are
independent of the REF542plus model supplied.

Note It is absolutely essential to edit the configuration dialogs Main

Menu/Configure/ Global Settings and Main
Menu/Configure/Hardware before the drawing editor is opened.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 34 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 4: Configuration dialog for the REF542plus Global Settings

Input field Node address: The Node address sets the addressing of the bay control
and protection unit over the interbay bus. Every device installed on an interbay bus is
assigned a unique device address.
Setting range: 1 ... 255
Default: 99

Input field Project: Enter a name for the project here. The name entered is only for
a more precise description and has nothing to do with the name under which the
application can be saved. One project can include several bays.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)

Input field Feeder: Enter a name for the feeder for which the application will be
created as part of the above project. The name entered is only for a more precise
description and has nothing to do with the name under which the application can be
saved.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)

Input field Global filter time: Time in ms required for an input signal to address
the binary input to be detected as such. The general filter time is valid for all binary
inputs and is added to a non-adjustable filter time that is set by the design of the unit
(1 ms). The last is referred to as the hardware filter time.
Setting range: 0 … 999 ms (Increment: 1 ms)
Default: 20

Input field active protection set: Parameter set of the protection parameter
that is intended to be active when the REF542plus is started. The active parameter
set can be changed later with the local control on the REF542plus operator view.
Setting range: 1 … 2 (Increment: 1)
Default: 1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 35 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field changes: A variable that shows the number of changes to the
configuration for the service in encrypted form appears here.

Information field Name of configuration: This shows the name under which the
application file/configuration file is saved.

Input range coil supervision: There are four checkboxes here that enable trip
circuit supervision (=coil supervision) to be activated for two trip circuits each for a
maximum of two binary input and output boards.
Checkbox board 1_1: Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output
1 on the 1st input and output board.
Checkbox board 1_2: Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output
2 on the 1st input and output board.
Checkbox board 2_1: Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output
1 on the 2nd input and output board.
Checkbox board 2_2: Activates or deactivates trip circuit supervision for binary output
2 on the 2nd input and output board.

Checkbox Errorsupervision: Activates fault supervision here by checking the

box. It monitors the switching of the controlled binary outputs. If the relays have not
reacted to the switching command, an error message will appear on the LCD screen
of the REF542plus HMI Control Unit.

Checkbox Doubleswitching: This provides the option of activating double

actuation. Then, after selecting a switching object once on the LCD screen of the
REF542plus HMI Control Unit, the option of sending two switching commands to this
switching object is available.
In general, three seconds are available for sending a switching command after
selecting a switching device. If double actuation is activated, another 10 seconds is
available to send another switching command after the first switching command.

Checkbox events: Mark this checkbox to allow event data to be generally sent to a
station automation system. See also the system events 1 and 2 buttons.

Checkbox autoreclosure (AR) used: Mark this checkbox to enable the

autoreclosure function in general.

Option field test mode: Select whether entry to the test mode is generally allowed
via the HMI Control Unit.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button system events 1: Clicking on this button starts a dialog window in which
various device-based events can be enabled. If they occur they are then sent to the
station automation system.

See also button system events 2 and checkbox events. Events may also be
enabled in the configuration dialogs of some function blocks and they are then based
on these.

Button system events 2: Clicking on this button starts another dialog window in
which various device-based events can be enabled. If these events occur they are
then sent to the station control system.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 36 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

See also button system events 1 and checkbox events. Events may also be
enabled in the configuration dialogs of some function blocks and they are then based
on these.

4.3.3 Hardware
The hardware configuration dialog window is opened with the menu Main Menu/
Configure/Hardware. General inputs on the REF542plus model for which the
configuration/application is to be created may be made there.

Note It is absolutely essential first to edit the configuration dialogs Main Menu/
Configure/ Global Settings and Main Menu/Configure/Hardware
to get to the drawing editor.

Figure 5: Dialog window for the REF542plus hardware configuration

Input range REF542plus housing: Various inputs regarding the type of housing in
use can be made here:

Options IO-slots: Specifies whether a small housing (2 input/output slots) or a wide

housing (4 input/output slots) is in use.

Checkbox with display(LCD screen): Mark this checkbox when the

REF542plus is connected to a HMI Control Unit
Input range binary IO boards:

<+> and <-> buttons: Increase or reduce the number of active binary input and
output boards. The desired number is shown in the information field on the left.

Options relay: Enter the type of relay that is used on the active binary input and
output boards. Either conventional (mechanical) relays or Solid State (transistor)
relays.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 37 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Caution Different binary I/O boards; with mechanical relays and with solid state
relays, cannot be combined in one REF542plus device.

Information field binary inputs, binary outputs: This shows how many binary
inputs and outputs are available depending on the number and type of boards in use.

Information field CPU board: Shows the number of analog inputs.

Input range analog output boards: Configure the number of analog output
boards in use here. These boards can only be used in the deep housing.

The <+> and <-> buttons are used for settings. The information field shows the
number of possible analog outputs.

Option field process bus: Mark whether the process bus is to be used or not.

Input range field bus: Use the button that opens the list field <> to open the
interbay bus variation selection list. Depending on the type of interbay bus the
parameters button is then activated.

Button parameters: When the SPA is selected, the number of communications

computers (the number of the gateway of the station automation system) can be
entered with the familiar control components in the dialog window.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.4 Analog inputs

The menu Main Menu/Configure/Terminals/Analog Inputs opens the
dialog window shown below. The analog measurement inputs of the REF542plus can
be configured and set for the transducers in use. The settings are particularly
important for the safe and proper functioning of the unit.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 38 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Figure 6: Example of the configuration dialog for setting the analog inputs

The dialog window is initially identical for all analog inputs (no.1 ... 8). For this reason
only one input and its configuration is described. Information on the setting ranges or
representative settings can be found below in the window in the information field.

Selection list type: First, open the selection list of possible types be clicked the < >
button for list selection. The type of the measurement recorder in use can be selected
there. Sensors (voltage sensors and Rogowski coils) and transducers (current and
voltage transformers) are available.

Input field calibration factor: This setting value only needs to be input when
using the Rogowski coil. It is used to monitor manufacturing tolerances in making the
coil. The calibration factor is printed on the Rogowski coil housing.

Caution Enter a calibration factor for the Rogowski coil only. With all other types
of analog measurement inputs, a calibration factor unequal to 1.0000
will result in incorrect measured values.

Input field nominal value of analog input: The nominal value at the analog
input is entered here, depending on the measurement recorder in use.
Setting ranges:

Input field nominal value of the net: The nominal value of the net is entered
here, depending on the measurement recorder in use. The nominal values are always
based on the medium voltage system that is to be monitored. The nominal value is
used for defining the bar LED display on the HMI Control Unit of the REF542plus.
Information fields below in the window: The applicable setting ranges are shown here
again as an aid.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 39 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.4.1 Setting the rated network values

Setting the rated network values can cause problems and is therefore precisely
explained again in the following section for the use of the analog measurement
inputs.

Current transformer

Input voltage
REF542: In 150 mV

Figure 7: Nominal values for the current transformer

Calibration factor: For proper functioning it must equal 1.0000.

Nominal value of analog input: The primary rated current of the current transformer is
entered here.
This is understood as the primary current that has to flow to generate a secondary
signal 1 A or 5 A (depending on the type of current transformer).
Nominal value of the net: The load current that should actually be expected is entered
here. At this value the LED bar on the HMI Control Unit will indicate the 100% value.

Voltage transformer

Nominal value
of analog input
Nominal
Input voltage
value of the net
REF542: Un=2V/√3

Figure 8: Rated network values for the voltage transformer

Note The REF542plus only measures the phase voltages. The line voltages are
calculated and then displayed. The voltage inputs are based on the line
voltage.

Calibration factor: For proper functioning it must equal 1.0000.

Nominal value of analog input: The secondary voltage of the primary voltage
transformers is entered here, In general this should be 100 V.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 40 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Caution The REF542plus assumes a nominal secondary voltage of 100V. The

setting of protection functions using the voltages has to be corrected if
the nominal secondary voltage is not 100.

Nominal value of the net: The primary line voltage of the network shall be entered
here. The secondary voltage of 100 V is generated at this value.

Rogowski coil

Input voltage
REF542: In 150 mV

Figure 9: Rated values for the Rogowski coil

Calibration factor: Entering the calibration factor eliminates the coil manufacturing
tolerance. It is printed on every Rogowski coil.
Nominal value of analog input: The rated current of the Rogowski coil is entered here.
This is understood as the primary current that has to flow to generate a secondary
signal of 150 mV.
Nominal value of the net: The load current that is actually expected is entered here.
At this value the LED bar on the HMI Control Unit will indicate 100%.

Voltage sensor

Nominal
value of the net

Input voltage
REF542: Un=2 V/√ 3

Figure 10: Rated values for the voltage sensor

Note The REF542plus only measures the phase voltages. The line voltages are
calculated and then displayed. The voltage inputs are based on the line
voltages.

Calibration factor: For proper functioning it must equal 1.0000.

Nominal value af analog input: The voltage sensor divisor ratio based on its
secondary output voltage of 2 V is entered here.
Voltage sensors with a rated voltage of 20 kV are currently in use. As an example,
10kV primary voltage is mapped to a secondary voltage of 1V.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 41 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Nominal value of the net: The actual primary line voltage of the network shall be
entered here.

4.3.4.2 The nominal values of the net and the protection settings

Voltage protection functions

Caution All voltage protection functions are always based on a secondary nominal
voltage value of Un=2 V. Proper configuration of the analog inputs is
therefore particularly important.

If a protection function is to be started at X·Un, the protection function will actually be

started if a voltage of X·2V is applied to the analog input.
Example: Overvoltage protection function U>
Nominal value of system to be protected: Un = 10 kV
Starting value: 1.2 Un
Voltage sensor: 20.000 V / 2 V
The overvoltage protection function should start if a secondary voltage of

10,000
U 2 = 1.2 2 V = 1.2 V
20,000
So the setting value is

1 .2 V
U SET = Un = 0.6 Un
2V

Current protection functions

Caution All current protection functions are based on 150 mV, thus the voltage
applied at the analog input at the rated load in the protected conductor.
Proper configuration of the analog inputs is therefore particularly
important.

If a protection function is started at X·In, the protection function will actually be started
if a current is applied that initiates a voltage of X·150 mV at the analog input.
Nominal value of cable to be protected: In = 200A
Starting value: 1.2 In
Rogowsky coil: 240 A /150 mV
The overcurrent protection function should start if a secondary voltage of

200
U 2 = 1.2 150 mV = 150 mV
240
So the setting value is

150 mV
I SET = In = 1.0 In
150 mV

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 42 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.3.5 Analog outputs

The menu Main Menu/Configure/Terminals/Analog Outputs opens the
dialog window shown below. The analog outputs on the REF542plus analog output
board can be configured there.

Figure 11: Configuration dialog for the analog outputs

Because all analog outputs are configured the same way, only one output is
described here. All setting options for an analog output can be found on one index
card:

Selection list: A click of the mouse on the button opens the selection list <>
and a REF542plus measured or calculated value can be selected. The value will then
be generated at the corresponding analog output.

Note The selection list always shows all possible measured and calculated values.
In fact only the following values can be output:
- Measured values applied to the analog inputs and
- calculated values required by a configured protection function.

Input field 0 mA= / 4 mA=: Specify what multiple of the rated value of a measured
or calculated value is mapped to the initial value of the analog output board. The
initial value of the output range of the analog output changes here depending on the
mode marked.
If 0 mA or 4 mA can be tapped at the analog output, the actual measured or
calculated value will be [-4.000 … +4.000] multiplied by its rated value.
Default: +0.0000 (Increment: 0.0001)
Setting range: -0.0000 … +4.0000

Input field 20 mA=: Specify what multiple of the rated value of a measured or
calculated value is mapped to the final value of the analog output board.
If 20 mA is generated at the analog output, the actual measured or calculated value
will be [-4.000 … +4.000] multiplied by its rated value.
Default: +0.0000 (Increment: 0.0001)
Setting range: -4.0000 … +4.0000

Option field mode: Mark the output mode here. This sets the output range to which
the input range set above will be mapped.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 43 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The option with zero signal current allows a continuous current to flow
through the line from the analog output board to the display device. This enables an
error message to be generated by the display device if no signal is received over the
line. However, this will limit the output range.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Note If the powerfactor cos phi is selected for the output, the meaning of the input
fields is different.
- The configuration-value of the 0mA(4mA)nominal value becomes the
minimal capacitive cos φ.
- The Configuration-value of the 20mA nominal value becomes the
maximal inductive cos φ.
- If cos φ is outside of the configured range, the output will be 24mA..
- if cos φ is not available (I,U < 1% of nominal value), the output will be
0mA(4mA).
see below.

REF542 Analog
Outputs
Power Factor cos ▼
φ

0mA = cos φ capacitive

20mA = cos φ inductive

Allowed values: -1.000 .. 0 .. +1.000

Mode
● 0 .. 20mA
○ 4 .. 20mA

Figure 12: Configuration dialog for the analog output of powerfactor cos φ

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 44 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Example 1: 0mA = 0 cos φ

capacitive
20mA = 0 cos φ inductive
This leads to the following analogue outputs:
φ/° cos φ Analogue Output/mA
-180 -1 capacitive 24
-90 0 capacitive 0
-60 0.5 capacitive 5
0 1 10
+60 0.5 inductive 15
+90 0 inductive 20
+180 -1 inductive 24
not available 0

Example2: 4mA = 0 cos φ

capacitive
20mA = 0 cos φ inductive
This leads to the following analogue outputs:
φ/° cos φ Analogue Output/mA
-180 -1 capacitive 24
-90 0 capacitive 4
-60 0.5 capacitive 8
0 1 12
+60 0.5 inductive 16
+90 0 inductive 20
+180 -1 inductive 24
not available 4
Figure 13: Examples for analog output of powerfactor cos φ

4.3.6 Calculated values

Figure 14: Configuration dialog for calculating some internal quantities

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 45 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The menu Main Menu/Configure/Calculated Values opens the dialog

window shown in Figure 12. Various settings that influence the calculation methods of
certain calculated values in the REF542plus are made here.

Option field Reference-arrow system: activates the operation direction, the so

called load or generator metering system, in the figure. The two diagrams in the
option field show the positively metered current direction.
The setting influences the sign of the values determined in the power calculation!
The choice of the metering system influences the sign in the power calculation.
The choice of the metering system does not affect the directional protection functions.

Option field power handling: The type of power calculation is configured here. The
three options are three-phase power calculation, power calculation by the Aron
method and deactivation of the power calculation.

Note Please remember that the choice of power calculation always requires
specific wiring of the analog inputs with sensors or transducers.

Input field Maximal measured value: This input window enables the length of a
time window in minutes to be input. The average value of the line currents is mapped
in this time window. The average value has a trailing pointer function. The maximum
value is indicated in the bar graph on the LCD screen with a perpendicular line.
The setting value 0 deactivates this function.
Setting range: 0 … 30 min. (increment: 1 min.)
Default: 0

Option field netfrequency: Select the network frequency of the network.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.7 Display
The menu Main Menu/Configure/Display … opens the dialog window shown in
Figure 13. This editor is used to configure the single line diagram displayed on the LC
display screen in standard operation. The editor is also used to configure the
connection between the single line diagram and the switching device.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 46 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.3.7.1 User controls for the editor for the LCD screen

Figure 15: Editor for configuring the single line diagram

The elements labeled in the above screenshot are described in the following
paragraphs:

1 Drawing field:
This area represents the area of the LCD screen of the HMI Control Unit REF542plus
usable for the single line diagram. The single line diagram configured here always fits
between the measured value display and the status line on the LCD screen.

2 Coordinates of the cursor position:

When mouse cursor is in the drawing field, the location coordinates will be shown in
the form x, y.

3. Buttons:
Button close: This closes the editor. The single line diagram is automatically saved
with the configuration. When the editor is closed the user is prompted to save the
single line diagram.

Buttons import and export: They offer the option of reusing a previously
configured single line diagram.
To do this the single line diagram must first be exported. After clicking on the
appropriate button, a standard dialog for saving the file to be exported appears. The
file name has the ending *.lcu.
If the user wishes to reuse or change a previously configured single line diagram,
click the import button. A standard dialog in which the file to be imported can be
selected appears. The file name must have the ending *.lcu.

Note Single line diagrams that were not prepared with the editor described above
cannot be imported.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 47 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button clear all: All elements on the drawing field will be deleted. If the
configuration has been previously saved, the drawing as it stands at this point will be
saved with it.

4 Tools:
The four buttons set the mode in which work on the drawing field is conducted. The
appearance of the mouse cursor also depends on the mode.

Button edit: Elements can be selected, moved and deleted in this

mode. The editing mode is always activated again after using other
modes.

Button symbol: Any icon can be added and configured on the drawing
field in this mode.

Button thin line: Use this mode to draw thin lines in the drawing field.

Button thick line: Use this mode to draw thick lines in the drawing
field.
The exact usage of the buttons will be explained in more detail after the editor
controls have been explained.

5 Option fields:
Option field Enable Sloping Lines: When this field is marked, diagonal lines can
be drawn on the drawing field as well as perpendicular and horizontal lines.

Option field Block moving: Marking this field prevents unwanted movement of
elements on the drawing field. To move an element, hold down the shift key. This key
must also be used for extending, shortening or changing the direction of lines.

6 Selected element:
A selected element is shown inverted. All operations can only be conducted on the
selected element. For this reason only one can be selected at any time.

7. Information field free Resources:

This shows information on the number of icons and lines (the possible elements) that
can still be drawn.

8. Information field marked element:

This shows information on the element that is to be selected:
Lines: Coordinates of the start and finish points, the line thickness (thin, thick) and the
line length in pixels.
Switching objects: Coordinates of the lower left corner, Field bus address and
comment for the function block that is represented.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 48 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Other icons: Coordinates of the left lower corner.

Mouse cursor appearance

The mouse cursor can also appear differently depending on the specific mode in the
drawing field:

Standard appearance: Shown when the mouse cursor is not on any

element.

Movement mouse cursor: Shown when the mouse cursor is on an

element. Click the mouse button to select the element.

Drag mouse cursor: Shown when the mouse cursor is on the end of a
selected line. The line can then be shortened or lengthened by dragging
with the left mouse button held down.

Icon mouse cursor: This is used in icon mode. Click the mouse to open
the configuration dialog for a new icon.

Line mouse cursor: This is used in line mode. Hold the left mouse button
down and drag to draw perpendicular, horizontal or diagonal (if enabled)
lines.

4.3.7.2 Working with the editor for the LCD screen

Select an element/deactivate selection

Click the left mouse button when the mouse cursor is on an icon or a line.
The selected icon is shown inverted; the sizing handles at the ends of the line are
emphasized.
Click the left mouse button when the mouse cursor is not on an element in the
drawing field.

Select sizing handle

Select a line. The sizing handles will show.
Move the mouse cursor to the sizing handle and hold the left mouse button down.
Drag the sizing handle with the mouse.
OR:
Mark one or the other sizing handle by using the key combination Ctrl+space
several times. Then the cursor keys on the keyboard can be used to make very
precise movements of the sizing handle.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 49 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Move element
Select the element and drag the mouse with the element while holding the left mouse
button down.
OR:
After selecting the element move it with the cursor keys on the keyboard.

Insert icon
Click the symbol button.

Move the mouse cursor to the position desired for the icon in the drawing field.
Click the left mouse button to open the icon configuration dialog.

Configure existing icon

Move the mouse cursor over the icon and double-click the left mouse button. The
configuration dialog then opens.

Insert line
Click the thin line or thick line button.

Move the mouse cursor in the drawing field to the position desired for the beginning of
the line.
Click the left mouse button and hold it down to set the beginning point of the line.
Drag the mouse with the button held down to the end point of the line. Release the
mouse button.

Configure existing line

Move the mouse cursor over the line and double-click the left mouse button. The
configuration dialog then opens.

Delete element
Select the element that is to be deleted.

Click the Del key on the keyboard. The user is then prompted to confirm or cancel
the deletion.

Change line size

Select sizing handle
Drag the mouse with the sizing handle while holding the left mouse button down.
OR:
After selecting the sizing handle move it with the cursor keys on the keyboard.

Change the appearance of a switching object

Click on the switching object icon while holding the Ctrl key down. Every switching
object has four different appearances, which represent its switching status.
OR:
Select the switching object and change its appearance with the key combination
Ctrl+space.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 50 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Select elements one after the other

Select an element

Use the keys Ctrl+right cursor or Ctrl+up cursor to select the next or the
previous element according to an internal sorting process.

Use the keys Ctrl+left cursor or Ctrl+down cursor to select the next or the
previous element in the opposite direction to the internal sorting process.

Copy drawing field to the clipboard

Use the Ins key on the keyboard to copy the entire drawing field to the clipboard as
a two-color bitmap graphic.

Open context-dependent popup menus

In addition to the options for conducting various operations described above, the
editor for the LCD screen also has content-dependent popup menus.
They are opened by clicking the right mouse button and the contents depend on
where the mouse cursor is on the drawing field at that time (popup menus can only be
opened there). A menu beside the mouse cursor opens in which various editing
options can be selected. This offers faster access to the various functions. All
functions offered there can also be accessed as described above.

4.3.7.3 Configuration dialog for icons

The configuration dialog for icons as shown in Figure 14, appears when a new icon is
added or if it is opened as described in the previous subsection.

Figure 16: Configuration dialog for icons in the editor for the LC display

List field Shape: Click the button to open the list field that displays the selection menu
for optional appearances of the icons. A description and the dimensions of the image
(height, width) are adjacent to the image. In the case of the switching objects, please
note that only one of four possible images is ever shown.

List field Field bus address: Set the connection between the element on the LC
display and the function chart. The selected icon represents the switching object with

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 51 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

the corresponding Field bus address on the LC display.

After clicking the button that opens the list field <>, the selection of possible Field
bus addresses that have been used in the function chart for switching objects
appears. The comment that can be entered in the configuration dialog of that
switching object is adjacent.

The list field Field bus address is opened automatically when an icon in the
above list field image has been selected.

Input fields position: The x and y coordinates appear at the lower left corner of the
icon. Other coordinates can be entered here to move the icon.

Option fields Single object/combined object: Here select whether the desired
switching object will be represented by one or two icons. The second icon can be
selected with the option fields earth switch/isolator. Only these two options
are available for the second icon.
Example: A 3-position switch (with some exceptions) can be shown using a
combination consisting of an earthing switch and an Isolator.

Option range selectability: Here select how the switching object can be selected
locally directly.
privileged: It is the first switching object that will be selected.
selectable: It can be selected.
The sequence in which the switching objects will be selected is set internally. Only the
switching object that will be selected first can be set (see above).
not selectable: This switching object cannot be selected locally on the REF542plus. (It
can only be addressed from the station control system.)
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.7.4 Configuration dialogue for lines

The configuration dialog for lines as shown in Figure 15, is opened as already
described in the subsection above.

Figure 17: Configuration dialog for lines in the editor for the LC display

Input range start position: Enter the x and y coordinates of the starting point of
the line into the two input fields. The current values appear there when the dialog
window is opened.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 52 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input range end position: Enter the x and y coordinates of the end point of the line
into the two input fields. The current values appear there when the dialog window is
opened.

Option field line thickness: Here mark whether the selected line should be drawn
thick or thin. The current values appear there when the dialog window is opened.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.3.8 Display language

The menu Main Menu/Configure/Display Language … opens the dialog win-
dow shown below. Select the language file from which the texts that appear on the LC
display screen will be read.

Figure 18: Configuration dialog for selecting the language of the texts on the LCD screen

List field display language: Click with the mouse on the button <> to open a
selection list with various files. The file is selected depending on the desired language
and the configuration used. The language English and German are provided as
default. Translation into other language can be done easily by editing the related stc-
file.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4 Function and configuration of the function blocks

This section describes all function blocks that can be added to the FUPLA or that are
already present in the FUPLA. The structure is adapted to the menu structure of the
Add menu in the function chart editor. Every description has a similar structure.

Description of the function blocks

A diagram of a function block is followed by an explanation of its function, its
connections and, if applicable, a typical application. This is followed by a screenshot
of the configuration dialog associated with the function block if it is not an information
dialog, which only has the OK or cancel buttons.

Finally, the various elements of the configuration dialog are explained. If input
parameters are involved, the input range and its optional increment and the default

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 53 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

value are also given. To ensure that every function block has a complete description,
elements that occur repeatedly are always described.

Description of the switching objects

Only the sections where the switching objects are described have a different
procedure. They are preceded by an additional section that describes a selected
switching object in detail. This includes information on the appearance of a switching
object in the function chart and its configuration dialog. All descriptions are somewhat
shorter in the sections on every single switching object.

Object number
The number on the left above every function block is the sequential number (object
number), which is assigned by the configuration software. It may be assigned several
times in the images of the function blocks. Every object number is only assigned once
in a correct application.

4.4.1 Control panel on HMI Control unit

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Control Panel.

4.4.1.1 Indication LED

Figure 19: Function block indication LED

Function
This function block represents the configurable indication LEDs adjacent to the LCD
screen on the HMI as local Control Unit. This function block can be used to address
the LEDs (light-emitting diodes) from the FUPLA and appropriate indication texts can
be added.

Typical application
Use of the signaling LED to receive the status indication for temperature supervision
of a motor. A green LED stands for example "OK“, an amber LED stands for "critical
status“ (with the starting signal of a protection function) and a red LED stands for
"fault: motor too hot“ (with the trip signal of a protection function).

Connections
The LEDs can be in one of four states depending on the wiring of the two inputs: off,
green, red, orange (amber). The indicated text depends on the color displayed by the
LED. The following tables show the corresponding combinations.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 54 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Table 4: Connections on the function block indication LED

Color Green Input Red Input
Off 0 0
Green 1 0
Red 0 1
Amber 1 1

Totally 32 LED´s, on 4 menu page each time 8 LED´s, can be adressed.

Configuration
The following subsection describe the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 20: General configuration dialog, indication LED function block

Input field Page number: Input of the number of the LED-page that is to be
configured.
Setting range: 1 … 4 (increment: 1)
Default: [number of the next LED that is not configured]

Input field LED number: Input of the number of the LED that is to be configured. The
number is also input in the function block.
Setting range: 1 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: [number of the next LED that is not configured]

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 55 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field text for the display: Text that is shown on the LCD screen after the
scan of the LED message texts when the LED is off. In the FUPLA the text is
displayed above the function block.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: [Empty]

Input field Green: The text will be displayed in the FUPLA above the function block
and on the LCD screen, when the condition is fulfilled.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: [Empty]

Input field Amber: The text will be displayed in the FUPLA above the function block
and on the LCD screen, when the condition is fulfilled.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: [Empty]

Input field Red: The text displayed will be displayed in the FUPLA above the function
block and on the LCD screen, when the condition is fulfilled.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: [Empty]

Parameter

Figure 21: Parameter configuration dialog, indication LED function block

Checkbox latch Signal: This checkbox must be marked if an acknowledgement is

required after the LED status (off, red, green or amber) has changed. If the reason for
the LED change of state is still in effect, the acknowledgement will have no effect.
Setting range: Marked/unmarked
Default: Unmarked

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 56 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about pins

Figure 22: Information dialog Pins, indication LED function block

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also an information wether the
pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.1.2 Alarm LED

Figure 23: Function block alarm LED

Function
This function block represents the alarm LED on the HMI Control Unit. This enables it
to be controlled from the FUPLA.

Connections:
The function block connections are not labeled on the function block. They are
described as the upper and lower connection.
There are two options for switching the alarm LED on and off:
The LED is switched on if the upper connection is at logical 1 and the LED is switched
off if the upper connection is at logical 0.
OR
the LED is switched on if the lower connection receives a logical 1 signal and the LED
is switched off if there is no longer a logical 1 signal at the lower connection
AND

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 57 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

if the "alarm" is acknowledged at the REF 542 control panel.

Typical application
This ALARM LED is on if a power circuit-breaker OFF command has been generated
by a protection function being addressed and the power circuit-breaker was tripped.

Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
appear in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.1.3 Alarm Reset

Figure 24: Function block alarm reset

Function
This function block provides return confirmations on the alarm and where the alarm
was acknowledged from in the function chart.

Connections:
ALARM output: Logical 1 if the alarm is still active and the ALARM LED is on (even
after an attempted acknowledgement of the alarm)

REMOTE output: Logical 1 impulse if acknowledged from the station control system.

LOCAL output: Logical 1 impulse if acknowledged "locally“.

Typical application
The signals received can be used to reset flip-flops if an alarm (e.g. power circuit-
breaker off) is acknowledged at the HMI Control Unit of the REF542plus.

Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
appear in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 58 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.1.4 LR-Key

Figure 25: Function block LR-Key

Function
This function block provides information on the position of the “local/remote“
keyswitch on the REF542plus control panel at both outputs.

Connections:
Table 5: Connection at the function block Local - Remote switchover
Connection Local Remote
No control (OFF) 0 0
Remote 0 1
Local 1 0
Local & Remote 1 1

Typical application
A reconfirmation of the keyswitch setting that can also be forwarded to a substation
automation system is possible with this function block. This enables switching
authorizations to be assigned, e.g. no switching operations permitted at the HMI
Control Unit.
If also the stati „No control“ or „Local&Remote“ are needed in the FUPLA, they can be
generated by placing a NAND-object behind. ???

Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
appear in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has made no connections. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.1.5 Emergency Buttons

Figure 26: Function block Emergency Buttons

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 59 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Function
This function module represents the two Emergency switch Off buttons on the HMI
Contol Unit. If a switch is actuated, a logical 1 appears at the corresponding function
block output.

Connections:
LEFT output: Logical 1 appears if the left key on the HMI Control Unit is actuated.

Both output: Logical 1 appears if the both keys on the HMI Control Unit are
actuated.

Typical application
Actuation of the tripping of the circuit-breaker with the both emergency switches.

Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
appear in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible. The connection numbers 1
(on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has made no
connections. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK button.

4.4.1.6 Beeper
Not supported anymore

4.4.2 Binary IO (switching objects)

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Binary IO.

The function blocks described here are switching objects. A switching object
represents one or more combined binary inputs and outputs in the function chart. In
the following instead of function chart the abreviation FUPLA will be used. A switching
object enables signals at the binary inputs to be used in the FUPLA: For example, the
message from a sensor that monitors the spring of a circuit-breaker or the position
messages of a switching device.
A switching object also enables signals to be sent to the binary outputs from the
FUPLA. For example, a switching command can be sent to a switching device in this
way. Both power and signal outputs can be addressed in the case of the outputs.
All the switching objects described in the following subsections have identically
structured FUPLA displays and configuration dialogs. To clarify the principle, a
switching object 2-1 is described below. However, all elements of the FUPLA display
and of the configuration dialog are explained with the individual switching objects. The
explanation there is somewhat shorter.
The switching object labeling already shows the principal structure. An example of a
switching object 2-1 can be seen in the next figure. The above mentioned switching
object represents the logical combination of two binary outputs and one binary input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 60 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Figure 27: Example of a switching object in the function chart (Fupla icon)

Number of the switching object

The sequential number appears to the upper left of the function block in the FUPLA. It
is automatically assigned by the configuration software and updated when function
blocks are deleted or new ones are added. It is used to localize the relevant function
block in the event of error messages from the configuration software. It is also
required in the internal processing of the function blocks in the REF542plus.

Connection comment/connection number

Every connection drawn in the function chart is assigned a connection number. A
comment will also be attached to the connection. Comment and number are
displayed with every connection in the function chart and the connection number is
also displayed in the configuration dialogs of the connected function blocks.

Number and type of the physical input

Physical binary inputs from the primary system are always placed in the right half of
the FUPLA display of a switching object. Their connections are also on the right. The
signal that is appeared to the physical input can be tapped at the relevant connection.
The type (BI - binary input etc.) and the input number of the physical input are also
shown in the function chart display.

Number and type of physical output

Physical binary outputs to the primary system are always placed in the left half of the
FUPLA display of a switching object. Their connections are also on the left. A logical
signal to the appropriate connection starts, if authorized, an output relay switching
operation. To enable this a logical 1 must be at the IL input and a logical 0 at the BL
input. Otherwise, the interlokking status LED will show red or the switching operation
will be suppressed. The type (OP - Open or CL - close etc.) and the channel number
of the physical input are also displayed in the FUPLA.

Pulse output
The connection pulse output is available only with switching objects that represent at
least one physical input and output. Because most switchgear can only switch with
short impulses, a closing time of 0 to 65000 ms is provided. This logical 1 is canceled
in the case of switching objects with a limit stop if a return confirmation regarding the
successful switching operation has been transmitted over a binary input of the
switching object. Switching objects have a limit stop if they represent at least one
physical input and output.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 61 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Limit stop
If inputs and outputs are combined in one switching object and internally
interconnected, the function block will include a limit stop, which functions as follows:
When the desired position of a switch is reached and the reconfirmation is received
via a binary input, the switching impulse (generated at P) is canceled, even if the
configured impulse length has not yet been reached.

The connection time monitor output Time> is available only with switching objects
that represent at least one physical input and output. A logical 1 appears at the
connection if the impulse time (at pulse output P) has expired and a reconfirmation
regarding the successful switching operation was not received by the binary input.

Interlocking input
The interlocking input (interlocking) connection is available only with switching objects
that represent at least one physical output. To enable a switching operation, there
must be a logical 1 at the connection IL. If a switching operation is started and the
interlokking input IL is at logical 0, an error message "interlocking violation“ will be
generated and displayed at the REF542plus control panel using the LED provided for
that purpose (interlocking status LED).

Blocking input
The connection blocking input (blocking) is available only with switching objects that
represent at least one physical output. If a logical 1 is applied to this connection, a
switching operation can be blocked. A logical 1 at the BL connection will place the
function block out of service. If the interlocking input IL is set to logical 1, a switching
operation would be allowed. However, this can be blocked by a logical 1 signal at the
connection BL. If a signal for the switching operation is given to the connection of the
physical output, no switching takes place and an "interlocking violation" error
message (interlocking status LED) is also generated.

Field bus address

The combined inputs can be addressed under an Field bus address as shown in the
next figure, in which a configuration dialog appears after double clicking the FUPLA
icon. The fiel bus address is to be input in the corresponding input field of the
configuartion dialog.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 62 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Figure 28: Example of the switching object configuration dialog

Furthermore there are other input field as following:

Input field Number and type of the physical input:

Enter a channel number for the physical binary inputs from the primary system.
Setting range: 0 …[number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Input Filtertime [ms]:

Enter a period in ms during which an input signal at the binary input must be applied
to be detected as such. The function block-dependent filter time entered here is
added to the general filter time, which is specified in the configuration dialog
REF542plus Global Settings, and to the hardware filter time, which is set by
the design of the binary input/output board.
Hardware filter time
+ General filter time
---------------------------
total filter time

Input field Number and type of physical output

Enter a channel number for the physical binary outputs to the primary system.
Setting range: 0 …[number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Note the different relay types.

Input field imp.length [ms]:

Because most switchgear can only switch with short impulses, a closing time of 0 to
65000 ms can be input in the configuration dialog under impulse length, which
has exactly the same effect on the actual output. This "extended“ switching signal is
generated as logical 1 at the pulse output P connection. This logical 1 is
canceled in the case of switching objects with a limit stop if a return confirmation
regarding the successful switching operation has been transmitted over a binary input

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 63 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

of the switching object. Switching objects have a limit stop if they represent at least
one physical input and output.

Input field number of cycles:

Enter the value of the mechanical switching cycle counter at the circuit-breaker here.
The value input is the starting value of the switching cycle counter in the REF542plus.
When the configuration is exported to the PC from the REF542plus, the current value
of the switching cycles is input at this position.

Note In this program version the input field is only used by the switching object 2-2
if a circuit-breaker is applied. It has no function with all other switching
objects.

Input field bus address

The Field bus address is shown at the bottom left of the FUPLA beside the switching
object: "Adr.: XX“. It is automatically assigned in the configuration dialog so every
Field bus address is only used once. Addresses that are freed (when a function block
is deleted) are assigned again by the configuration software. As an alternative the
Field bus address can also be assigned in the configuration dialog with the interbay
bus selection list. The selection list is displayed by clicking the  button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: The next free Field bus address automatically

Information field Pins

List of connections on the function block with adjacent connection number. The
connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made.

Input box Setting for switching object-specific special function

Checkboxes for activating or deactivating functions appear here. Further information
can be found in the switching object description.

Button Events
The events button cannot be selected if the transmission of events is generally
suppressed in the REF542plus Global Settings.
A dialog window opens when this button is clicked. Here the events are released that
are then sent to the station automation system. The default is for all events to be
released for sending.
An event that has been sent is a message to the station control system regarding a
change in status. Depending on the function block type, different events can be ge-
nerated and released. The input can be accepted or canceled in the dialog field with
the two buttons.

Input field Comment:

Remarks regarding the switching object may be input here. Then it is also shown on
the upper left of the switching object in the function chart.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Button OK
Configuration dialog:
All settings are incorporated into the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button cancel
Configuration dialog:
No setting is changed in the configuration software. The dialog window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 64 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.2.1 Switching object 0-1

Figure 29: Function block switching object 0-1

Function
The signal of a physical binary input is made available in the function block.

Connections:
BI output: Connection at which the binary input signal of the represented physical
input can be tapped.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 65 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Table 6: Connection labels switching object 0-1

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
Bl Input Bl

Typical application
Connection of a gas pressure monitor that sends a logical 1 or 0 to the relevant binary
input.

Configuration

Figure 30: Configuration dialog switching object 0-1

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is used only once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the  button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 …127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input to be represented. The assigned number, highlighted in Figure 28,
will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 66 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.2 Switching object 0-3

Figure 31: Function block switching object 0-3

Function
The signal of three physical binary inputs is made available in the function block. All
connections are addressed over one Field bus address.

Connections:
EARTH, OPEN, LINE outputs: Connections at which the binary input signals of the
various represented physical inputs can be tapped.

Table 7: Connection labels switching object 0-3

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
EARTH Input No. earth Bl earth
OPEN Input No. open Bl open
LINE Input No. line Bl line

Typical application
Position confirmation signal from a manually operated switching device, e.g. a 3-
position Isolator.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 67 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 32: Configuration dialog switching object 0-3

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the  button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 …127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 68 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.3 Switching object 1-0

Figure 33: Function block switching object 1-0

Function
Actuates a physical binary output from the function chart.

Connections:
IL input: Interlocking input; a switching operation can only be conducted if there is a
logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

PO input: Signaling input for a physical output, a logical 1 initiates, if enabled, an

output relay switching operation.

P output: Pulse output; a logical 1 can be tapped for the duration of the output relay
switching operation.

Table 8: Connection labels switching object 1-0

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
PO Output No. PO active
IL - IL
P - Pulse
BL - BL

Typical application
Use as output for the contact signalling of e.g. general start.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 69 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 34: Configuration dialog switching object 1-0

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selec-
ted from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field Output No. [Name] (once per represented output): Enter the number of
the physical output that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented output): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Checkbox use two step switch command: If two-stage switching is activated, a

switching object must be selected with a command from the station control system
and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 70 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.4 Switching object 1-1

Figure 35: Function block switching object 1-1

Function
Actuates a physical binary output from the function chart. The return confirmation is
received via the physical binary input, which can be tapped in the function chart.

Connections:
IL input: Interlocking input; a switching operation can only be conducted if there is a
logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

PO input: Signaling input for a physical output. A logical signal to this function block in-
put starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output
relay.

P output: Pulse output; a logical 1 can be tapped for the duration of the output relay
switching operation.

BI output: Signal output at which the binary input signal of the represented physical
input can be tapped.

Time > output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 71 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Table 9: Connection labels switching object 1-1

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL
BL - BL
PO Output No. PO Active
TIME> - Time>
BI Input No. Bl
P - Pulse

Typical application
Using the physical output to actuate a tension motor for the spring of a power circuit-
breaker. The return confirmation over the physical input then provides information on
the spring status.

Configuration

Figure 36: Configuration dialog switching object 1-1

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selec-
ted from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field Output No. [Name] (once per represented output): Enter the number of
the physical output that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 72 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented output): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Checkbox use two step switch command: If two-stage switching is activated, a

switching object must be selected with a command from the station control system
and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.5 Switching object 1-2

Figure 37: Function block switching object 1-2

Function
Actuates a physical binary output from the function chart. The return confirmation is
received via two physical binary inputs, which can be tapped in the function chart.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 73 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections:
IL input: Interlocking input; a switching operation can only be conducted if there is a
logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

PO input: Signaling input for a physical output. A logical signal to this function block
input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output
relay.

Time > output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

OP, CL outputs: Signal outputs at which the binary input signal of the represented
physical input can be tapped.

P output: Pulse output; a logical 1 can be tapped for the duration of the output relay
switching operation.

Table 10: Connection labels switching object 1-2

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL
BL - BL
PO Output No. PO Active
TIME> - Time>
OP Input No. open BI open
CL Input No. closed BI closed
P - Pulse

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 74 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 38: Configuration dialog switching object 1-2

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field Output No. [Name] (once per represented output): Enter the number of
the physical output that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented output): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented.
The assigned number, underlined in white, will also be shown in the function block
adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 75 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Checkbox indicate intermediate position: If this checkbox is marked, an

intermediate setting will be displayed on the LC display screen during the switching
operation. This enables a visual return confirmation of the switching operation on the
LCD screen.
Otherwise only the initial and final positions are displayed during a switching
operation.

Checkbox use two step switch command: If two-stage switching is activated, a

switching object must be selected with a command from the station control system
and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.6 Switching object 2-1

Figure 39: Function block switching object 2-1

Function
Actuates two physical binary outputs from the function chart. The return confirmation
is received via the physical binary input, which can be tapped in the function chart.

Connections:
IL input: Interlocking input; a switching operation can only be conducted if there is a
logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

OP, CL inputs: Signaling inputs for one physical output each. A logical signal to this
function block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the
represented output relay.

Time > output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 76 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

BI output: Signal output at which the binary input signal of the represented physical
input can be tapped.

P outputs: Pulse output, one for each represented output; a logical 1 can be tapped
for the duration of the switching operation of the output relay

Table 11: Connection labels switching object 2-1

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL open
IL - IL closed
BL - BL
OP Output No. open PO open
CL Output No. close PO closed
TIME> - Time>
BI Input No. BI
P - Pulse open
P - Pulse close

Configuration

Figure 40: Configuration dialog switching object 2-1

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 77 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range for physical outputs Every input field exists once per represented
output:

Input field Output No. [Name] (once per represented output): Enter the number of
the physical output that should be represented here. The assigned number,
underlined in white, is also shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented output): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment (once per represented input): Enter remarks on the switching
object here (e.g. purpose). The text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above
the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 21 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Checkbox use two step switch command: If two-stage switching is activated, a

switching object must be selected with a command from the station control system
and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 78 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.2.7 Switching object 2-2

Figure 41: Function block switching object 2-2

Function
Actuates two physical binary outputs from the FUPLA. The reconfirmation is received
via two physical binary inputs, which can be defined in the FUPLA. This switching
object can also be used to actuate a circuit-breaker.

Connections:
IL inputs: Interlocking inputs, one per represented output; a switching operation can
be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

OP, CL inputs (left): FUPLA inputs for actuating each time the related physical
output. A logical signal to this function block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding
switching operation of the related output relay.

SYNCH. input: Not synchronized input, a closing operation is only allowed, if a logical
0 signal is present at the the input.

RES. GRANT input:: Reservation grant input, a switching operation is only possible,
if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in connection
with LON communication per LON Application Guide LAG version 1.4 as confirmation
the reservation request.

Time > output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

OP, CL outputs (right): Channel definition of the signal outputs coming from the
status information of the primary switching device.

P outputs: Pulse output, one per represented output; a logical 1 can be tapped for
the duration of the switching operation of the output relay

DEF OPEN output: Defined open output, which generates a logical 1 signal if the
switching device has reached the definitive open position.

DEF CLOSE output: Defined close output, which generates a logical 1 signal if the
switching device has reached the definitive close position.

DEF POS output: Defined Position output, which generates a logical 1 signal if the
switching device has reached the definitive open or closed position.

ERROR POS output: Error Position output, which generates a logical 1 signal if both
open and close output has a logical 1 signal or if the the switching operation is
interrupted by overreaching the time monitor.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 79 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

RES. REQ output: Reservation request output, which is normally used in connection
with LON communivcation per LAG 1.4. Before starting the switching operation a
reservation request must be done by generating a logical 1 signal at this output.

Table 12: Connection labels switching object 2-2

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL open
IL - IL closed
BL - BL
OP (left) Output No. open PO open
CL (left) Output No. close PO closed
SYNCH. - NOT Synchronized
RES. GRANT - Reservation Granted
TIME OUT - Time Limit Expired
OP (right) Input No. open -
CL (right) Input No. close -
BI Input No. BI
P - Pulse pin open
P - Pulse pin close
DEF. OPEN - Defined open
DEF. CLOSE - Defined Closed
DEF. POS - Def Position
ERROR POS - Error Position
TIMEOUT - Time Limit Expired
RES. REQ - Reservation Request

Typical application
Use of the binary outputs to actuate a motor-driven Isolator. The position status
confirmation signal is received via the two binary inputs.

Configuration
The following subsection describes the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs
you can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 80 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

General

Figure 42: General configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once.
As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selected from the list field, which
is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field comment: Enter remarks the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The text
will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Option Field Kind of switching device: Mark the checkbox corresponding to

the switching device used.

Option Field Options: Several checkboxes as following are foreseen:

Checkbox Indicate intermediate position is marked, an intermediate

setting will be displayed on the LCD screen during the switching operation. This
enables a visual return confirmation of the switching operation on the LCD screen.
Otherwise only the initial and final positions are displayed during a switching
operation.
Checkbox Enable two step command: If two-stage switching is activated, a
switching object must be selected with a command from the station automation
system and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.

Checkbox Invert inputs: The logical sinal of the inputs will be inverted.

Option Field Open/Close activated by: Enter the signal used for the switching
operation.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 81 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Outputs

Figure 43: Outputs configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2

Parameter field Ouput open: The following input fields are present:

Input field Output: Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented.
The assigned number will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 27 [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Pulse length [ms]: Enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit interrupts the switching operation, if
necessary.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

Parameter field Output close: The following input field are present:

Input field Output: Enter the number of the physical output that is to be represented.
The assigned number will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 27 [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Pulse length [ms]: Enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit interrupts the switching operation, if
necessary.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

Input field Switch cycles: Enter the number of switching cycle during the
reconfiguration of the REF542plus.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 82 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Inputs

Figure 44: Inputs configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2

Parameter field Position indication open:

Input field Input [Name]: Enter the number of the physical input that is to be
represented. The assigned number will be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 42 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filter time [ms]: Enter the time during which a signal must be applied
at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical signal. The input filter time is
added to the hardware and to the general filter time.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

Parameter field Position indication close:

Input field Input [Name]: Enter the number of the physical input that is to be
represented. The assigned number will be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 42 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filter time [ms]: Enter the time during which a signal must be applied
at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical signal. The input filter time is
added to the hardware and to the general filter time.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

Input field Response time: Enter the maximum duration of the time for the granting
the reservation.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

Input field Synchron time: Enter the maximum duration of the time for the
sychronization of the closing operation.
Setting range: 0 … 65000 (increment: 1)
Default: 100

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 83 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Events

Figure 45: Events configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set All: All events are marked and generated and sent as required.
Butte Clear All: No event is marked.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ...
7, 18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 … E0 and E31 … E16: The marking of events is
here also possible. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is in
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not used from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimal code in the input
fields.
The following table shows an overview of the events of the function block unbalanced
load protection.

Switching Object 2-2

10 E0 Moving E4 Error
10 E1 Input opened E2 Input closed
10 E5 Output opened E6 Output closed
10 E7 End position not reached started E8 End position not reached back
10 E9 Output 2 opened E10 Output 2 closed
10 E15 Blocked inactive E16 Blocked active
10 E17 Interloced inactive E18 Interloced active

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 84 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Switching Object 2-2

10 E19 Synch. Bypass inactive E20 Synch. Bypass active
10 E21 Selected back E22 Selected started
10 E23 Bypass inactive E24 Bypass active
10 E26 Select confirmation positive E27 Select confirmation negative
10 E28 Execution confirmation positive E29 Execution confirmation negative
10 E30 Execution termination positive E31 Execution termination negative

Information about pins

Figure 46: Information dialog Pins, function block switching object 2-2

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information regarding
whether the pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1
(on one input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no
connections made.

4.4.2.8 Switching object 4-3: Motorcard

Figure 47: Function block switching object 4-3 motor

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 85 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Note This switching object can only be used with the input/output board with
mechanical relays. One switching object 4-3 motor board or 6-5 magnet
motor board per board can be used in the application.

Function
Used to actuate two binary physical outputs, which are specially designed for the
motor control unit. The required reconfirmations of the switching position are received
via the three physical binary inputs.

Note Because these functions are only available at specific binary outputs on the
binary input/output boards, the output numbers have fixed assignments.

Connections:
IL inputs: Interlocking inputs, one per represented output; a switching operation can
be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

OPEN EARTH/ISOLATOR, CLOSE EARTH/ISOLATOR inputs (left): Signaling inputs

for one physical output each. A logical signal to this function block input starts, if ena-
bled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output relay.

EARTH, OPEN, LINE outputs (right): Signal outputs at which the binary input signal
of the represented physical input can be tapped.

PP outputs: Pulse outputs, one per represented output; a logical 1 can be tapped for
the duration of the switching operation of the output relay

Table 13: Connection labels switching object 4-3 Motor Card

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL earth open
IL - IL earth close
IL - IL isol. open
IL - IL isol. close
OPEN EARTH open earth Open earth
CLOSE EATH close earth close earth
OPEN ISOLATOR open isolator open isolator
CLOSE ISOLATOR close isolator close isolator
EARTH Input No. earth Earth
OPEN Input No. open Open
LINE Input No. line Line
P - PP isol close
P - PP isol. open

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 86 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the

configuration dialog configuration dialog
P - PP earth close
P - PP earth open

Typical application
This enables a 3-position switch to be actuated with a motor drive. Additional auxiliary
relays for activating and deactivating the motor are not required. Information on the
switch status is received via the three free configurable binary inputs. The switching
object itself assumes the subsequent control sequences:
Checking the interlock conditions,
Switch on pole reversal relay, depending on selection,
Switch on motor relay
Switch off motor relay after reaching the end position and
Brake motor by short circuiting the motor windings.
This functions with special circuitry of two relays on the binary input/output board with
conventional relays.
A 3-position Isolator is represented by two separate objects (Isolator and earth
switch) on the LCD screen, which are then configured as a combined object.

Configuration

Figure 48: Configuration dialog function block switching object 4-3 motor

The impulse length that can be input is based on the switching operation from an end
setting to the intermediate setting.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 87 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once.
As an alternative the Field bus address can also be selected from the list field, which
is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field open/close earth, open/close isolator (once per represented

output): The number of the represented physical output is a fixed assignment.
It will also be shown in the function block underlined in white adjacent to the connec-
tion.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented output): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary. The impulse length is based on
a switching operation from an end setting to the intermediate setting and therefore is
only assigned once.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned number, underlined in
white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF Global
Settings.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 88 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.2.9 Switching object 6-5: Magnetmotorcard

Figure 49: Function block switching object 6-5 magnet motor

Note This switching object can only be used with the input/output board with
conventional relays. One switching object 4-3 motor board or 6-5 magnet
motor board per board can be used in the application.

Function
Used to actuate four binary physical outputs, which are specially designed for the mo-
tor control unit. The required return confirmations are received via the five physical bi-
nary inputs. The function block itself assumes the subsequent sequential control:

Connections:
IL inputs: Interlocking inputs, one per represented output; a switching operation can
be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

OPEN EARTH/ISOLATOR, CLOSE EARTH/ISOLATOR BLOCK 1/2 inputs (left):

Signalling inputs for one physical output each. A logical signal to this function block
input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output
relay. The BLOCK 1/2 inputs cannot be influenced, their function is implemented
over the relay circuitry.

EARTH, OPEN, LINE, BLOCK 1/2 outputs (right): Signal outputs at which the bi-
nary input signal of the represented physical input can be tapped.

PP outputs: Pulse outputs, one per represented output; a logical 1 can be tapped for
the duration of the switching operation of the output relay

Table 14: Connection label switching object 6-5 magnet motor

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL earth open
IL - IL earth close
IL - IL isol. open
IL - IL isol. close
IL - IL BL1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 89 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the

configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL - IL BL2
OPEN EARTH open earth Open earth
CLOSE EATH close earth close earth
OPEN ISOLATOR open isolator open isolator
CLOSE ISOLATOR close isolator close isolator
BLOCK 1 (right) Output BL 1 -
BLOCK 2 (right) Output BL 2 -
EARTH Input No. earth Earth
OPEN Input No. open Open
LINE Input No. line Line
BLOCK 1 (right) Input BL 1 Block 1
BLOCK 2 (right) Input BL 2 Block 2
P - PP isol. open
P - PP isol close
P - PP earth. open
P - PP earth close
P - PP BL 1
P - PP BL 2

Typical application
This enables a 3-position switch to be actuated with a motor drive. Additional auxiliary
relays for activating and deactivating the motor are not required. Information on the
switch status is received via the three free configurable binary inputs. In contrast to
the switching object 4-3 motor, installed interlock magnets can be activated and
deactivated at the 3-position Isolator. The reconfirmation on the position of the
interlock magnets is done via two binary inputs. In this way the motor can be
prevented from running over a non-activated interlock magnet. The sequential control
itself assumes the subsequent control sequences:
Checking the interlock conditions,
Unlock interlock magnets,
Switch on pole reversal relay, depending on selection,
Switch on motor relay
Switch off motor relay after reaching the end position and
Brake motor by short circuiting the motor windings.
This functions with special circuitry of two relays on the binary input/output board with
conventional relays.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 90 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 50: Configuration dialog function block switching object 6-5 magnet motor

Note The impulse length that can be input is based on the switching operation from
an end setting to the intermediate setting.

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field open/close earth, open/close isolator, output BL1/BL2

(once per represented output): The number of the represented physical output is a
fixed assignment. It will also be shown in the function block underlined in white
adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field imp.length [ms] (once per represented input): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary. The impulse length is based on
a switching operation from an end setting to the intermediate setting and therefore is
only assigned once.

Input field No. of cycles (once per represented output): Not used.

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented output): Enter the number of
the physical input that should be represented here. The assigned number, underlined
in white, is also shown in the function block adjacent to the connection.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 91 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented output): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the Global Settings.

4.4.2.10 Switching object 2-2: H bridge Card

Figure 51: Function block switching object 2-2 H bridge

Note This switching object can only be used with the input/output board with solid
state relays. One switching object 2-2 H bridge or 4-4 H bridge can be used in
the application per board.

Function
Used to actuate four binary physical outputs, which are specially designed for the
motor control unit. The required return confirmations are received via the three
physical binary inputs.
Only two of the four physical outputs in use can be actuated. The other two are used
to implement the desired functions and are actuated internally.

Connections:
IL inputs: Interlocking inputs, one per represented output; a switching operation can
be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 92 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

LINE, EARTH inputs (left): Signaling inputs for one physical output each. A logical
signal to this function block input starts, if enabled, a corresponding switching operati-
on of the represented output relay. The unlabelled inputs cannot be influenced, their
function is implemented over the relay circuitry.

RES. GRANT inputs: Reservation grant input, a switching operation is only possible,
if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in connection
with LON communication per LAG 1.4 as confirmation of the reservation request.

Time > output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set
impulse time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching
operation is no longer received over the represented binary input.

LINE, EARTH outputs (right): Signal outputs at which the binary input signal of the
represented physical input can be tapped.

PP outputs: Pulse outputs, one per represented output; a logical 1 can be tapped for
the duration of the switching operation of the output relay

RES. REQ outputs: Reservation request output, which is normally used in

connection with LON communivcation per LAG 1.4. Before starting the switching
operation a reservation request must be done by generating a logical 1 signal at this
output.

Table 15: Connection labels switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

FUPLA display Parameter setting range of the Connection label in the
configuration dialog configuration dialog
IL (EARTH) - IL earth
IL (LINE) - IL line
EARTH (left) Earth Earth
LINE (left) Line Line
BL - BL
EARTH (right) Input No. earth BI earth
LINE (right) Input No. line BI line
RES. GRANT - Reservation granted
TIME > - Timeout
VALID - Valid Position
RES. REQ - Reservation Request

Typical application
This switching object can be used to control a motor-driven transfer switch without an
intermediate setting. This functions with special circuitry of two relays on the binary
input/output board with solid state relays.

Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 93 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 52: General configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.
Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)
Default: Empty

Option field Options: Mark the option required for displaying the switching operation
on the LCD screen.
Checkbox Enable two step command: If two-stage switching is activated, a
switching object must be selected with a command from the station automation
system and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.

Checkbox Invert inputs: The logical sinal of the inputs will be inverted.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 94 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Parameter

Figure 53: Parameter configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

Input field Brake time: Enter a time in ms here for which the motor windings will be
short-circuited to brake the motor after reaching the end position.
Setting range: 0 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 100

Input field Waiting time: Enter a time in ms here during which no switching
command may be sent to prevent overloading the transistors on the input/output
board and the motor.
Setting range: 2 000 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 2 000

Input field MaxTimeToGrant: Enter a time in ms here during which the reservation of
the switching operation in connection with the LON Communication per LAG 1.4 will
be granted.

Outputs

Figure 54: Outputs configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 95 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field No. of cycles (available twice): Not used.

Input fields Pulse length: Enter the maximum duration of the output relay
switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the switching operation will be
ended before if necessary.

Inputs

Figure 55: Inputs configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

Input fields Line, Earth: The number of the represented physical output is a fixed
assignment.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Input No. [Name] (once per represented input): Enter the number of
the physical input that is to be represented.
The assigned number will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 …42 [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filtertime[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 96 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Events

Figure 56: Events configuration dialog, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set All: All events are marked and generated and sent as required.
Butte Clear All: No event is marked.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ...
7, 18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 … E0 and E31 … E16: The marking of events is
also possible here. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is in
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not use from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimal code in the input
fields.
The following table shows an overview of the events of the function block unbalanced
load protection.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 97 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Switching Object 2-2

8 E0 Switch Position Intermediate E4 Switch Position Error
8 E1 Switch Position Open E2 Switch Position Closed
8 E9 Command timeout inactive E10 Command timeout active
8 E13 Interlocking error left E14 Interlocking error right
8 E15 Blocked inactive E16 Blocked active
8 E17 Interlocked inactive E18 Interlocked active
8 E21 Selected inactive E22 Selected active
8 E23 Interlocking bypass inactive E24 Interlocking bypass active
8 E26 Select confirmation positive E27 Select confirmation negative
8 E28 Execution confirmation positive E29 Execution confirmation negative
8 E30 Execution termination positive E31 Execution termination negative

Information about pins

Figure 57: Information dialog Pins, function block switching object 2-2 H-Bridge

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information regarding
whether the pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1
(on one input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no
connections made.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 98 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.2.11 Switching object 4-4 H bridge

BO: Earth Switch ON BI: Earth Switch ON

BO: Earth Switch OFF BI: Earth Switch OFF

BO: Line ON BI: Line ON

BO: Line OFF BI: Line OFF

Figure 58: Function block switching object 4-4 H bridge

Note This switching object can only be used with the binary input output board with
solid state relays. One switching object 2-2 H bridge or 4-4 H bridge can be
used in the application per board.

Function
Used to actuate four binary physical outputs, which are specially designed for the
motor control unit. The required return confirmations are received via the five physical
binary inputs. The function block itself assumes the subsequent sequential control:
The VALID signalling output signals a valid position of the 3-position switch: Earth
switch closed, intermediate setting (earth switch and Line open), line opened. The
valid position is reached when the pulse outputs are logical 0 and the binary inputs
signal one of the three above positions.
The binary input SUP/earth switch supervision enables sensors that also supervise
the all-pole correct earthing to be connected. If this binary input is not used, the
connection pin on the function block must be set to logical 1 or connected with the
earth switch OFF connection pin.

Connections:
IL inputs: Interlocking inputs, one per represented output; a switching operation can
be conducted if there is a logical 1 here.

BL input: Blocking input; if there is a logical 1 signal here, the switching operations of
the represented output will be blocked.

BO: Earth switch ON/OFF, BO: Line ON/OFF inputs (left): Signalling inputs
for one physical output each. A logical signal to this function block input starts, if
enabled, a corresponding switching operation of the represented output relay. The
unlabelled inputs cannot be influenced, their function is implemented over the relay
circuitry.

TIME> output: Time monitor output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the set impulse
time is expired and a return confirmation regarding the correct switching operation is
no longer received over the represented binary input.

RES. GRANT inputs: Reservation grant input, a switching operation is only possible,
if the logical 1 signal is present at the input. This input is normally used in connection
with LON communication per LAG 1.4 as confirmation of the reservation request.

BI: Earth switch ON/OFF, BI: Line ON/OFF outputs (right): Signal outputs
at which the binary input signal of the represented physical input can be tapped.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 99 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

PP RIGHT/PP LEFT outputs: Pulse outputs, one per represented output; a logical 1
can be tapped for the duration of the switching operation of the output relay PP
RIGHT is the pulse output for the busbar–intermediate setting–earth movement
direction and PP LEFT is the pulse output for the earth–intermediate setting–busbar
movement direction.

VALID output: Signaling output; if a logical 1 can be tapped here, the 3-position
switch has reached a valid position.

SUP: Signaling output for a physical input. Used for additional supervision of the posi-
tion earth switch all-pole closed.

RES. REQ outputs: Reservation request output, which is normally used in

connection with LON communivcation per LAG 1.4. Before starting the switching
operation a reservation request must be done by generating a logical 1 signal at this
output.
Table 16: Connection labels switching object 4-4 H-Bridge
FUPLA display Parameter setting range of Connection label in the
the configuration dialog configuration dialog
BL - Block
IL - IL close Earth
IL - IL open earth
IL - IL close line
IL - IL open line
BO: Earthswitch ON Earth close Close earth
BO: Earthswitch OFF Earth open Open earth
BO: Line ON Line close Close line
BO: Line OFF Line open Open line
RES. GRANT - Reservation granted
PP right - PP right
PP left - PP left
RES. GRANT - Reservation granted
TIME > - Timeout
VALID - Valid Position
BI: Earth switch ON Earth closed BI Earth closed
BI: Earth switch OFF Earth opened BI Earth opened
BI: Line ON Line closed BI Line opened
BI Line OFF Line opened BI line closed
SUP Earth switch supervision Earth supervision
RES. REQ - Reservation Request

Typical application
This enables a 3-position switch to be actuated with a motor drive. Additional auxiliary
relays for activating and deactivating the motor are not required. Information on the
switch status is received via the three free configurable binary inputs. The switching
object itself assumes the subsequent control sequences:

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 100 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Checking the interlock conditions,

Switch on pole reversal relay, depending on selection,
Switch on motor relay
Switch off motor relay after reaching the end position and
Brake motor by short circuiting the motor windings.
Activate timing circuit for dead time.
This functions with special circuitry of two relays on the binary input/output board with
conventional relays.
A 3-position Isolator is represented by two separate objects (Isolator and earth
switch) on the HMI LCD screen, which are then configured as a combined object.

Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can access the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 59: General configuration dialog, function block 4-4 H-Bridge

List field Field bus address: It is automatically assigned so every Field bus
address is only used once. As an alternative the Field bus address can also be
selected from the list field, which is displayed by clicking the <> button.
Setting range: 5 … 49 and 111 … 127 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free Field bus address

Input field comment: Enter remarks on the switching object here (e.g. purpose). The
text will also appear in the FUPLA on the left above the switching object.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 101 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: 0 … 20 characters (standard character set)

Default: Empty

Option field Options: Mark the option required for displaying the switching operation
on the LCD screen.
Checkbox Enable two step command: If two-stage switching is activated, a
switching object must be selected with a command from the station automation
system and switched with a 2nd command.
This option does not refer to local switching.

Checkbox Invert inputs: The logical sinal of the inputs will be inverted.

Parameters

Figure 60: Parameters configuration dialog, function block 4-4 H-Bridge

Input field brake time: Enter a time in ms here for which the motor windings will be
short-circuited to brake the motor after reaching the end position.
Setting range: 0 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 100

Input field waiting time: Enter a time in ms here during which no switching com-
mand may be sent, to prevent overloading the transistors on the input/output board
and the motor.
Setting range: 2 000 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 2 000

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 102 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Outputs

Figure 61: Outputs configuration dialog, function block 4-4 H-Bridge

Input fields earth close/open, line close/open: The number of the

represented physical output is a fixed assignment.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input fields No. of cycles (once per represented output pair): Not used.

Input fields pulse length (once per represented output pair): Enter the maximum
duration of the output relay switching operation. In function blocks with limit stops the
switching operation will be ended before if necessary.

Inputs

Figure 62: Inputs configuration dialog, function block 4-4 H-Bridge

Input field Earth/Line closed/opened input (once per represented input):

Enter the number of the physical input that is to be represented. The assigned

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 103 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

number, underlined in white, will also be shown in the function block adjacent to the
connection.
Setting range: 0 … 42 [number of binary inputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field Filter Time[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Inputs

Figure 63: Inputs configuration dialog, function block 4-4 H-Bridge

Input field Input: Enter a 0 as number of the represented input so as not to use the
earth switch supervision (SUP) binary input.

Input field Filter Time[ms] (once per represented input): Enter the time during
which a signal must be applied at the physical binary input to be detected as a logical
signal. The input filter time is added to the hardware and to the general filter time.

Events

Figure 64: Events configuration dialog, function block switching object 4-4 H-Bridge

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 104 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set All: All events are marked and generated and sent as required.
Butte Clear All: No event is marked.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ... 7,
18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 … E0 and E31 … E16: The marking of events is
also possible here. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is in
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not used from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimalcode in the input
fields.
The following table shows an overview of the events of the functionblock unbalanced
load protection.

Switching Object 4-4 H Bridge

Event Text Event Text
E0 Disc. Pos. Intermediate E16 Blocked active

E1 Disc. Pos. Closed E17 Disc. Interlocked inactive

E2 Disc. Pos. Opened E18 Disc. Interlocked active
E3 not selectable E19 Earth interlocked inactive

E4 Disc. Pos. Error E20 Earth interlocked active

E5 Earth Pos. Intermediate E21 Selected inactive
E6 Earth Pos. Closed E22 Selected active
E7 Earth Pos. Opened E23 Interlock bypass inactive

E8 Earth Pos. Error E24 Interlock bypass active

E9 Command timeout inactive E25 not selectable

E10 Command timeout active E26 Select confirmation positive

E11 not selectable E27 Select confirmation negative
E12 not selectable E28 Execution confirmation positive

E13 Interlocking error left E29 Execution confirmation negative

E14 Interlocking error right E30 Execution termination positive

E15 Blocked inactive E31 Execution termination negative

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 105 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about pins

Figure 65: Information dialog Pins, function block switching object 4-4 H-Bridge

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information on whether the
pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.2.12 Module for truck (withdrawal unit)

Figure 66: Function block module for truck

Function
This function block is used to move or hide switch icons on the LCD screen. Fixed
icons (transducers, motors, generators etc.) cannot be hidden or moved, because
they do not have a unique Field bus address.
The interconnections of the switch icons on the LC display screen with the switching
objects in the function chart are shown with the Field bus address. In the same way,
the function block module for thrust is linked to the switching icon that is to be moved
or hidden with the Field bus address.

Connections:
Input jump (move): If this input is set to logical 1, an icon on the LCD screen is
moved 11 pixels to the left.
If the input is set to logical 0 again, the icon on the LCD screen will resume its initial
position.

Input disapp.: If the input is set to logical 1 again, the icon on the LCD screen will
be hidden.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 106 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

If the input is set to logical 0 again, the icon on the LCD screen will become visible
again.

Typical application
If the power circuit-breaker is on a trolley (thrust), it must also be possible to show its
end positions on the LCD screen. The power circuit breaker icon must be correctly
displayed depending on the actual position of the thrust (operating or test position).
In addition, if the power circuit-breaker is no longer connected with the other
secondary technology, this status must be shown on the LCD screen. For example,
this occurs when the icon is hidden.

Configuration

Figure 67: Configuration dialog function block module for truck

List field Field bus address: After clicking the button that opens the list field
<>, a selection list of the Field bus addresses used in the function chart appears.
Select the Field bus address of the switching object whose icon is to be moved on the
LC display screen.

Information fields jump/disappear: The connections of the function block with the
connection number connected to it are shown here. Inputs are not possible.
If there are no connections on the function block yet, connection number 1 will
appear. It indicates an input.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.2.13 IO-Supervision

Figure 68: Function block trip circuit supervision

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 107 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Function
This function block provides the messages from the trip circuit supervision to the
function chart. The REF542plus Global Settings referring to trip circuit supervision
and the FUPLA are linked in this way. The single messages can be blocked
independently of one another. In addition, the entire function block can be blocked; a
signal regarding that can be tapped at one of its outputs. The error messages from
the trip circuit supervision cannot be suppressed on the LC display screen.
Up to two output channels can be monitored for the first two binary input/output
boards (cards). The trip circuit supervision must be activated in the Global Settings of
the configuration software for every channel.

Connections:
Because the labelling of the inputs and outputs is partly abbreviated in the function
block and in the configuration dialog, the list below expands the abbreviation if
necessary.

BCS11/BI.Ca.1 Co.1 input:

Blocking Coil Supervision 11/blocking board 1 coil 1: If a logical 1 is set on this
channel, the output signal will be blocked thereby generating the supervision function
of this coil.

BCS12/BI.Ca.1 Co.2 input:

Blocking Coil Supervision 12/blocking board 1 coil 2: If a logical 1 is set on this
channel, the output signal will be blocked thereby generating the supervision function
of this coil.

BCS21/BI.Ca.2 Co.1 input:

Blocking Coil Supervision 21/blocking board 2 coil 1: If a logical 1 is set on this
channel, the output signal will be blocked thereby generating the supervision function
of this coil.

BCS22/BI.Ca.2.Co.2 input:
Blocking Coil Supervision 22/blocking board 2 coil 2: If a logical 1 is set on this
channel, the output signal will be blocked thereby generating the supervision function
of this coil.

B.A.S./BI. active superv.input:

Blocking Active Supervision/blocking input switch supervision: If a logical 1 is applied
to this connection, switch supervision will be deactivated.

Coil supervision Card1 Coil1/St. Ca.1 Co.1 output:

Start board 1 coil 1: If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output, the trip circuit
supervision for the corresponding coil has detected an error.

Coil supervision Card1 Coil2/St. Ca.1 Co.2 output:

Start board 1 coil 2: If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output, the trip circuit
supervision for the corresponding coil has detected an error.

Coil supervision Card2 Coil1/St. Ca.2 Co.1 output:

Start board 2 coil 1: If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output, the trip circuit
supervision for the corresponding coil has detected an error.

Coil supervision Card1 Coil2/St. Ca.2 Co.2 output:

Start board 2 coil 2: If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output, the trip circuit
supervision for the corresponding coil has detected an error.

Active Supervision/St. active superv. output:

Start switch supervision: If a logical 1 can be tapped at this output, the switch

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 108 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

supervision is operating. If a logical 0 can be tapped, the switch supervision is not

active because it has been blocked via the B.A.S. input.

Typical application
The trip circuit supervision can be used to detect defective trip solenoids on the power
circuit-breaker. For example, the return confirmation over the function block trip circuit
supervision can be used to generate an event for a station control system. Inter-
locking of the power circuit-breaker is also possible.

Configuration
Only the function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them
appear in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible. The names of the
connections in the configuration dialog are German and in the FUPLA display
English. Both labels can be found in the connection description.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.3 Digital logic 1

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Digital Logic 1.

4.4.3.1 Inverter

Figure 69: Function block inverter

Function
The inverter inverts the input signal and sends it to its output.

Logic table
On Off
1 0
0 1

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 109 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.3.2 Constant 1/Constant 0

Figure 70: Function blocks constant 1 and constant 0

Function
The two function blocks continuously send a logical 0 and a logical 1 respectively to
their outputs.

Logic table
Constant 0 Constant 1
Output Output
0 1

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.3.3 AND logic gate with inverted output

Figure 71: Function block AND logic gate with inverting output

Function
This AND logic gate inverts the output signal. Otherwise, the function is identical to
the standard AND logic gate.

Logic table
On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 110 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.3.4 AND logic gate with an inverting input

Figure 72: Function blocks AND logic gate with inverting inputs

Function
These AND logic gates all have an inverting input. Because only the inverted input is
changed, only one function block is described here.

Logic table
On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.3.5 AND logic gate

Figure 73: Function blocks AND logic gate with varying input number

Function
The AND logic gates execute a logical AND interconnection on their inputs (left on the
function block). The result of this logical operation is available on the output (right on
the function block).
Therefore a logical 1 appears on the output when all inputs are set to logical 1.
The AND logic gates shown above differ only in the number of inputs.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 111 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Logic table
On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

The logic table shown above shows as an example the function of the AND logic gate
with two inputs.

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.3.6 OR logic gate

Figure 74: Function blocks OR logic gate with varying output numbers

Function
The OR logic gates execute a logical OR interconnection of their inputs (left on the
function block). The result of this logical operation is available on the output (right on
the function block).
Therefore a logical 1 appears on the output when one of the inputs is set to logical 1.
The OR logic gates shown above differ only in the number of inputs.

Logic table
The logic table shown below shows as an example the function of the OR logic gate
with two inputs.

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 112 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK but-
ton.

4.4.3.7 OR logic gate with inverting output

Figure 75: Function block OR logic gate with inverting output (NOR logic gate)

Function
This OR logic gate inverts the output signal. Otherwise, the function is identical to the
standard OR logic gate.

Logic table
On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK but-
ton.

4.4.4 Digital logic 2

The following subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are
available via the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Digital Logic 2.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 113 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.4.1 Exclusive OR logic gate

Figure 76: Function block exclusive OR logic gate with varying input number

Function
The exclusive OR logic gates execute a logical exclusive OR interconnection of their
inputs (left on the function block). The result of this logical operation is available at the
output (right on the function block).
Therefore a logical 1 appears at the output when at least one of the inputs is set to
logical 1. In contrast to the OR logic gate, a logical 0 appears on the output if all
inputs are set to logical 1. The exclusive OR logic gates shown above differ only in
the number of inputs.

Logic table
The logic table shown below shows as an example the function of the exclusive OR
logic gate with two inputs.

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 114 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.4.2 Exclusive OR logic gates with inverting output

Figure 77: Function block exclusive OR logic gate with inverting output and varying number of
inputs

Function
The exclusive OR logic gates with inverting output execute a logical exclusive OR
interconnection of their inputs (left on the function block). The result of this logical
operation is available in inverted form at the output (right on the function block).
Therefore, a logical 1 appears at the output if all inputs are set to logical 0 or logical 1.
In contrast to OR logic gates with inverting output, a logical 1 appears at the output if
all inputs are set to logical 1.

Logic table
The logic table shown below shows as an example the function of the exclusive OR
logic gate with two inputs.

On 1 On 2 Off
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5 Flip-Flops
The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Flip-Flops.

Flip-Flops are memory elements with two stable states. Switching between the states
is referred to as toggling. A suitable actuation (depending on the type of flip-flop) will
switch it to the other state. Because this state remains effective at the outputs of the
flip-flop if there are no input signals, they are referred to as memory elements. Some
flip-flops are also actuated by a timing input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 115 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

To enable the time sequence to be taken into account in the logic tables as well, a
time before toggling (switching) the flip-flop (tn) and a time after toggling (tn+1) is
defined. Therefore, output signals before toggling are labeled Qn and Qn+1 after
toggling.
If the flip-flop also has a timing input, the state before the timing input is labeled index
n and the state after the timing input as index n+1. The change of state at the timing
input from logical 0 to logical 1 or vice versa is decisive for the switching process. It is
referred to as the rising or falling slope.

4.4.5.1 R-S Flip-Flop

Figure 78: Function block RS flip-flop

Function
A logical 1 at the S-input results in a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the
R-input results in a logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals will remain active at the outputs.
If both inputs are at logical 1, the R-input is dominant. However, this state contradicts
the basic flip-flop principle of two stable states and must therefore be avoided.

Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the table below because the state is always opposite to Q.

R S Q
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5.2 R-S flip-flop with timing input (clock)

Figure 79: Function block RS flip-flop with timing input

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 116 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Function
A logical 1 at the S-input combined with a rising slope at the timing input (C) results in
a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the R-input combined with a rising slope at
the timing input (C) results in a logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals on the outputs will remain active if
there is no longer a rising slope at the timing input. With the rising slope the signals at
the inputs will be input.
If both inputs are at logical 1, both outputs are at logical 1 with the rising slope at the
timing input. However, this state contradicts the basic flip-flop principle of two stable
states and therefore must be avoided.

Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the table below, because the state is always set opposite to
Q. tn is the time before the rising slope at the timing input and tn+1 is the time after it.

tn tn+1
R S Q Remark
0 0 Qn
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 - Illegal state

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5.3 J-K Flip-Flop

Figure 80: Function block J-K flip-flop with timing input (clock)

Function
A logical 1 at the J-input (logical 0 at the K-input) combined with a falling slope at the
timing input (C) results in a logical 1 at the Q-output. A logical 1 at the K-input (logical
0 at the J-input) combined with a falling slope at the timing input (C) results in a
logical 0 at the Q-output.
If the input signals are reset to logical 0, the signals will remain active at the outputs
regardless of the timing input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 117 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

If both inputs are at logical 1, the signals on the two outputs with the falling slope are
inverted at the timing input.

Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the table below, because the state is always set opposite to
Q. tn is the time before the falling slope at the timing input and tn+1 is the time after it.

tn tn+1
J K Q Remark
0 0 Qn The prior state remains
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 Qn The prior state is inverted

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5.4 D Flip-Flop

Figure 81: Function block D flip-flop

Function
The signal at the D-input of the flip-flop is transferred with the next positive slope of
the Q-output. The timing pulses (clock) cause a delayed output of the input signal on
the output.

Logic table
Qinverted is not included in the table below, because the state is always set opposite to
Q. tn is the time before the rising slope at the timing input and tn+1 is the time after it.

tn tn+1
D Q
0 0
1 1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 118 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5.5 T Flip-Flop

Figure 82: Function block T flip-flop

Function
The signals at the outputs will be inverted with the positive slope at the timing input T.
Q is logical 0 as the output state, to ensure that there is a defined state during the
REF542plus starting procedure. The signal at the output is always opposite to the
signal at the output Q.
This enables the T flip-flop to operate as a binary divider; the period duration of the
signals at the outputs is double the length of the clock at the T-input. A constant
frequency clock signal is required.

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.5.6 Monoflop retriggerable

Figure 83: Function block retriggerable monoflop

Function
The logical value at the D-input is directly incorporated (in practice with its own rising
slope) on the Q-output. It remains there for the configurable time. Finally, the output
falls back to the only stable state of logical 0 again. The Q-output is set immediately
to logical 0 by a logical 1 on the reset input (RES or K). If a rising slope occurs at the
D-input again while the output is also still at logical 1, the timing circuit will be
restarted.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 119 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

The signal at the inverted is always opposite to the signal at the output Q.

Configuration
Input field time [ms]: Enter the time in ms here for which the output signal should
be retained after a rising slope of the input signal.
Setting range: 15 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 15

Information field pins: The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one
output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.5.7 Monoflop non-retriggerable

Figure 84: Function block non-retriggerable monoflop

Function
The logical value at the D-input is directly incorporated (in practice with its own rising
slope) on to the Q-output. It remains there for the configurable time. Finally, the
output falls back to the only stable state of logical 0 again. The Q-output is set
immediately to logical 0 by a logical 1 on the reset input (RES or K). If a rising slope
occurs at the D-input again while the output is also still at logical 1, this signal will be
ignored.
The signal at the inverted is always opposite to the signal at the output Q.

Configuration
Input field time [ms]: Enter the time in ms here for which the output signal should
be retained after a rising slope of the input signal.
Setting range: 15 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 15

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with the adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 120 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.5.8 Drop Delay/Rise Delay (slope delay)

Figure 85: Function blocks slope delay: rising and falling

Function
These two function blocks delay the falling and rising slope of a logical signal at the
input (left connection).
The delayed logical signal is then available at the output (right connection). The delay
period may be input in the configuration dialog.
The diagram below shows how the two function blocks work.

Input signal
t

Output signal
slope delay falling t
tdf
Output signal
slope delay rising
t
tdr
Figure 86: Flow chart of the slope delay function blocks

Configuration dialogue

Figure 87: Configuration dialog slope delay rising (and falling)

The setting options are identical in both configuration dialogs. Only the name of the
function block in the window title is different.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 121 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field time [ms]: Input of the delay period in ms. The rising/falling slope of the
output signal is delayed for this period relative to the input signal. The input period is
also shown in the function chart below the FUPLA icon.
Setting range: 15 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 15

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.5.9 Counter

Figure 88: Function block counter

Function
The function block counter puts a logical 1 on its output (right on the function block)
after a preset No. of cycles have been sent to its CLOCK input (timing input, left on
the function block). The output is set with the rising slope of the last required input
impulse.
If a logical 1 is set to the RESET input (left on the function block), the output is reset
to logical 0 or the counting process is stopped and the internal counter is set to 0.

Configuration dialogue

Figure 89: Configuration dialog counter

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 122 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field number: Input of the number of input impulses required to generate a
logical 1 at the output of the function block (right on the FUPLA icon). Here, the rising
slopes of the input signal are decisive for the function block. The number input is also
shown in the function chart below the FUPLA icon.
Setting range: 0 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 0

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.5.10 Pulse generator

Figure 90: Function block pulse generator

Function
The function block pulse generator sends a pulse sequence at its output (right on the
function block). Logical 1 and logical 0 values alternate in this process. Their duration
can be set in the configuration dialog.
The diagram below shows the setting options for the pulse generator:

Output signal
t

tON tOFF tON tOFF tON

Figure 91: Output signal of the pulse generator

Output (right on the function block): The generated pulse sequence can be tapped
here.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 123 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 92: Configuration dialog pulse generator

Input field High Time(ms): The duration in ms of the logical 1 impulse (tON) is
entered here. The input period is also visible in the FUPLA below the function block.
Setting range: 15 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 15

Input field Low Time(ms): The duration in ms of the logical 0 impulse (tOFF) is
entered here. The input period is also visible in the FUPLA below the function block.
Setting range: 15 … 65 000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 15

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.5.11 Digital Store object

Figure 93: Function block digital Store object

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 124 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Function
The digital store object continuously saves the current digital values at its input. If the
auxiliary supply voltage fails, the last saved values are retained. In this event they will
be available at the appropriate outputs after the REF542plus has restarted. If the
reset or RESET input is at logical 1, the output signals will all be set to logical 0.

Typical application
The signals, that, for example, have generated a switching authorization, are retained
in this way after a power failure. Otherwise the switching authorization would be lost,
because all outputs and inputs on the REF542plus take a defined state.

Configuration
The connections of the function block are shown in the configuration dialog with the
connection numbers to which they are connected. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.6 Analog components

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Analog Objects.

4.4.6.1 Analog Threshold

Figure 94: Function block analog threshold

Function
Each of the seven analog measuring inputs can be monitored to detect if it falls below
or exceeds a threshold value. If the measured value falls below or exceeds the
configurable trip threshold (threshold value), the supervision function is activated. If
the trip threshold exceeds or is below the threshold after a configurable period, a trip
signal is generated. The trip threshold and the period for exceeding or falling below
the measured value may be configured separately.

Connections:
B> input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the trip signal for signalling that the
threshold value has been exceeded will be suppressed.

B< input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the trip signal for signalling that the
threshold value has not been reached will be suppressed.

S> output: The starting signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has
been exceeded.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 125 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

S< output: The starting signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has
not been reached.
> output: The trip signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has been
exceeded.

< output: The trip signal (logical 1) can be tapped here if the threshold value has not
been reached.

Typical application
The threshold values can be used to ascertain that a bay has no voltage. It makes
sense to generate various interlock conditions with this signal. Please observe the
restrictions regarding the threshold object:
Maximum of 10 threshold objects per analog measuring input (=> 70 per
configuration),
Minimum reaction time: 500 ms,
The threshold objects cannot select a direct switching output.

Configuration

Figure 95: Configuration dialog threshold object

Input field Field bus address: This is automatically assigned but can also be
changed in the adjacent set limits. All (max. 10) threshold objects that refer to a
measuring input have the same Field bus address. The Field bus address is used for
addressing the function block in the event of interbay bus commands. It is also shown
in the function chart below the function block.

Input field number: The sequential number of the threshold object is input here. It is
also shown in the function chart below the function block. It is also used to distinguish
a maximum of 10 threshold objects per analog measuring input.

Input field TR >: The trip threshold for exceeding the threshold is input here in
multiples of the rated voltage or of the rated current.
Setting range: 0.1 … 10 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 1.00

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 126 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field time (under TR >): Enter the time in seconds here for which the
measured value must exceed the threshold value before a trip signal is generated.
Setting range: 0.5 … 300 s (increment 0.01 s)
Default: 1.00

Input field TR <: The trip threshold for falling below the threshold is input here in mul-
tiples of the rated voltage or of the rated current.
Setting range: 0.1 … 10 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field time (under TR <): Enter the time in seconds here for which the
measured value must fall below the threshold value before a trip signal is generated.
Setting range: 0.5 … 300 s (increment 0.01 s)
Default: 1.00

Option field Analog Inputs: The measuring input that is to be monitored by the
threshold object can be marked here. Measuring inputs fitted with transducers can
also be monitored.
Setting range: [Sensor 1 … sensor 7]
Default: Sensor 1

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.6.2 Energy management

Figure 96: Function block energy management

Function
This function block is used to influence the internal energy calculations in the
REF542plus. On one hand the count process can be stopped and on the other hand
a return block can be activated. In this case the energy is not counted backwards if
the energy direction changes.
Depending on the hardware configuration the power is calculated from the current
and voltage values at the analog inputs. The internal REF542plus time clock is then
used to calculate the energy. The energy values can be displayed at the LCD screen.

Note The internal energy calculation only functions with configured power
calculation.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 127 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections:
COUNT/no count input: The count process is stopped if there is a logical 1 at this
input.

BACK/no back input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, backwards counting is sup-
pressed if the energy direction changes.

Typical application
The energy count provides an overview of the generated/consumed bay-specific
energy.

Configuration
The function block connections with the connection numbers attached to them appear
in the configuration dialog. Inputs are not possible.
The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function
block still has no connections made. These inputs are then confirmed with the OK
button.

4.4.6.3 Energy counter

Figure 97: Function block energy counter

Function
This function block uses impulses to meter energy. Every impulse is assigned to a
configurable energy value. The energy metered here is then displayed in the
measured value display on the LCD screen of the REF542plus HMI Control Unit.

Typical application
Use this function block if there is an energy measuring instrument in the bay that is
being configured. Its impulses can be sent to the energy counter in the function chart
over a binary input.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 128 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 98: Configuration energy counter

Information field Field bus address: The permanently assigned Field bus
address is displayed here. All energy counters have the same address.

Input field number: Enter a number to distinguish several configured energy

counters. The number is also shown in the function chart above the function block.
Setting range: 1 … 15 (increment: 1)
Default: [The next free energy counter number]

Input field multiplicationfactor: The energy in kWh that represents an

incoming impulse is entered here. The multiplier is shown in the function chart in the
function block.
Setting range: 0.1 … 1000 (increment: 0.1)
Default: 100

Input field Display text (LCU): Enter text here that is to be displayed on the LCD
screen to enable several energy counters to be distinguished more easily.
Setting range: 0 … 18 characters (standard character set)
Default: Default no. [number of the energy counter]

Information field BI: The number of the connection is shown here. If there is no
connection yet, a 1 is shown.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.6.4 Energy pulse output

Figure 99: Function block energy impulse output

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 129 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Function
This function block sends impulses that represent a specific energy quantity to its
output (energy). The impulses are generated based on the internal energy
calculations of the REF542plus.
The DSP calculates the energy and sends standardized energy packets to the
microcontroller. This receives a number of standardized energy packets about twice a
second and calculates the absolute energy amount from them according to the
following formula:

Un
Energy Quantity = standardized energy packets In
953
The energy amount is then converted to the corresponding No. of cycles. If there is a
remainder after the conversion into pulses, it will be included in the next conversion.
The energy impulse output can send up to 70 pulses after a calculation. Additional
pulses are ignored and the overflow output is then set to logical 1. If the number of
calculated pulses is reduced below 65 again, the overflow output is reset to logical
0. Note that In and Un in the above formula are the rated values of the
sensors/transducers in use.

Note To add this function block, the power calculation must be activated.

Note Use this function block only with binary input/output boards with solid state
relays. The conventional relays are limited in their number of switching cycles
and therefore are not suited for this.

Typical application
Use this function block to control an external energy display with the impulses from
the REF542plus.

Configuration

Figure 100: Configuration dialog energy impulse output

Option field energy: Mark here whether the impulse should represent active or
reactive energy.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 130 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Option field energy flow: Select the direction of the energy flow. Only energy of
this direction will be converted to the corresponding impulse.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Input field pulse per kWh: Enter in kWh the calculated energy amount that an
impulse represents.
Setting range: 0.1 … 1000 (increment: 0.1)
Default: 1.0

Input field pulse length: The duration of the output impulse in ms can be varied
here to ensure that the external energy display functions correctly.
Setting range: 50 … 150 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 150
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

4.4.6.5 LON sensor (not support)

This function is not supported anymore

4.4.6.6 Power Factor Controller

Figure 101: Function block power factor controller

Connections
BL(Blocking) input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the power factor
control-ler functions.
Disconnect input: A logical 1 signal at this input switches off all active capacitor
banks.
Reset input: A logical 1 signal at this input resets the General Alarm. If this alarm
status is not reset, the control function will remain blocked.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 131 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Overtemp. input: A logical 1 signal at this input generates a General Alarm

message and immediately switches off all capacitor banks.
V MIN/MAX input: A logical 1 signal at this input generates a General Alarm
message and immediately switches off all capacitor banks.
V A MAX input: A logical 1 signal at this input results in a General Alarm message.
Mode: Man. input: A logical 1 signal on this input changes switches the operating
mode of the power factor controller from automatic to manual.
Set Night input: A logical 1 signal on this input switches the parameter setting
from day to night.
Manual Control Bank 0...3 input (once per capacitor bank): A logical 1
signal on this input results in capacitor bank C0 ... capacitor bank C3 being switched
on or off depending on its switch status.
Checked Back Bank 0...3 input: A logical 1 signal on this input indicates
whether capacitor bank C0 ... capacitor bank C3 is switched on.
Alarm Q output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if all capacitor banks in the
network are already switched on and the power factor for the reactive power control
still remains below the limit.

Alarm cos ϕ output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if the set power factor cos
ϕ for the alarm is instantaneously below the limit.
Alarm Operat. output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if the set maximum
number of switching cycles for one of the capacitor banks is exceeded.
Alarm General output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here if a general alarm is
generated following relevant input information such as (OVERTEMP., V MIN/MAX,
VA MAX,DISCONNECT).
The function is blocked as long as the alarm is active. The power factor controller will
only be ready for operation again after the alarm has been acknowledged
Switch On/Off Bank 0 ... 3 output (once per condensator bank): A logical 1
signal or logical 0 signal can be tapped here if capacitor bank C0 ... C3 is to be
switched on or off.

Configuration
The following subsection describes the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs
you can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 132 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

General

Figure 102: General configuration dialog, function block power factor controller

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Option field Switching sequence: This selects how the capacitor banks should be
switched on or off when they are the same size.

Linear: It is switched on in ascending sequence and switched off in descending

sequence.

Circular: It is switched on and off in ascending sequence.

Switching Hysteresis option field: Settings for starting to switch the capacitor
banks on or off for reactive power control
Neutral zone(KOFF)input field: The threshold for switching off is calculated with the
adjustable percentage factor, which is based on the smallest installed capacitor
output QC0 .
Setting range: 105 ... 200 % of Q C0 (increment: 1).
Default: 115
Pickup value (KON)input field: The threshold for switching on is calculated with the
adjustable percentage factor, which is based on the smallest installed capacitor
output QC0.
Setting range: 0 ... 100 % of Q C0 (increment: 1).
Default: 0.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 133 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Capacitor banks

Figure 103: Capacitor banks configuration dialog, function block power factor controller

Reactive power of smallest bank Q C0 input field: Default for the smallest
module of the set capacitor output in bank 0.
Setting range: 1,000 ... 20,000 kVAr (increment: 1)
Default: 100,000
Input field for configuration of banks: Default for combinations of output units
of the capacitor banks in the sequence bank 0, bank 1, bank 2 and bank 3. Using less
than 4 banks the figures beginning from right were ignored.
Setting range: 1:1:1:1; 1:1:2:2; 1:2:2:2; 1:2:4:4; 1:2:4:8.
Default: 1:1:1:1
Buttons +/- for number of banks: Setting the number of installed capacitor
banks.
Setting range: 1 ... 4 (increment: 1)
Default: 1

Input field for maximum switching cycles: An alarm message can be generated
with this setting if the number of switching cycles of one switching device of a
capacitor bank is exceeded.
Setting range: 0 ... 10000 (increment: 1)
Default: 2500.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 134 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Control Data

Figure 104: Control data configuration dialog, function block power factor controller

Input field for setpoint cos phi, day (once per parameter set): Input of the set-
point of the power factor cos ϕ for day control of the reactive power. If the value drops
below the setpoint, the control is activated.
Setting range: 0.70 ... 1.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0,90
With the option field inductive/capacitive.
Default: Inductive
Input field for setpoint cos phi, night (once per parameter set): Input of the
setpoint of the power factor cos ϕ for night control of the reactive power. If the value
drops below the setpoint, the control is activated.
Setting range: 0.70 ... 1.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0,90

The option field inductive/capacitive allows setting of the type of reactive

power to be compensated.
Default: Inductive

Input field for limiting value cos ϕ (alarm) day (once per parameter set):
Input of the limit value of the power factor cos ϕ for the alarm during day operation. If
the value falls below the limit value, an alarm message is generated.
Setting range: 0.00 ... 1.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0,00

The option field inductive/capacitive allows setting of the type of reactive

power to be compensated.
Default: Inductive

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 135 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field for limiting value cos ϕ (alarm) night (once per parameter
set):
Input of the limit value of the power factor cos ϕ for the alarm during night operation. If
the value falls below the limit value, an alarm message is generated.
Setting range: 0.00 ... 1.00 (increment: 1)
Default: 0,00

The option field inductive/capacitive allows setting of the type of reactive

power to be compensated.
Default: Inductive
Input field for method of operation (once per parameter set): The criteria for
controlling the reactive power can be determined directly from the current values or
after an integration for averaging the values.
Setting range: Direct / integrating
Default: Direct.

Time

Figure 105: Time configuration dialog, function block power factor controller

Input field for discharge blocking time (once per parameter set): After a capa-
citor bank is switched off, it can only be switched on again after the discharge period
has expired.
Setting range: 1 ... 7200 s (increment: 1)
Default: 900
Input field for dead time (once per parameter set): After a capacitor bank is
switched on, the control function is initially deactivated for the period of the dead time.
Setting range: 1 ... 120 s (increment: 1)
Default: 10
Input field for power on delay (once per parameter set): After a complete switch
off of all banks the reclosing is avoided for the power on delay time.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 136 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: 1 ... 7200 s (increment: 1)

Default: 900
Input field for duration of integration (once per parameter set): The reactive
power or the power factor is determined after the values have been averaged within
the set integration period. This parameter is used from the function block only if
integration is used as method of operation.
Setting range: 1 ... 7200 s (increment: 1)
Default: 900.

Events

Figure 106: Events configuration dialog, function block power factor controller

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set All: All events are marked and generated and sent as required.
Button Clear All: No event is marked.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ... 7,
18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 ... E0 and E31 ... E16: The marking of events
is also possible here. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is in
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not used from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimal code in the input
fields.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 137 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Power Factor Controller

97 E00 Bank 0 ON E04 Bank 0 OFF
97 E01 Bank 1 ON E05 Bank 1 OFF
97 E02 Bank 2 ON E06 Bank 2 OFF
97 E03 Bank 3 ON E07 Bank 3 OFF
97 E08 Overtemperature started E09 Overtemperature back
97 E10 Va max started E11 Va max back
97 E12 Vmin/max started E13 Vmin/max back
97 E14 Command DISCONNECT started E15 Command DISCONNECT back
97 E16 Cos phi warning started E17 Cos phi warning back
97 E18 Alarm Q started E19 Alarm Q back
97 E20 Warning switching cycles E21 Alarm reset
97 E22 Block signal started E23 Block signal back
97 E24 Manual operating mode E25 Automatic operating mode
97 E26 Night mode E27 Day mode

Information about pins

Figure 107: Information dialog Pins, function block power factor controller

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information on whether the
pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) or 2 (on one output) still appear if the function block has no connections made.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 138 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.7 General Information on protection functions

Caution Note the following three restrictions when configuring the protection
functions. If one of them is not taken into consideration, proper
functioning of the REF542plus cannot be guaranteed:
A maximum of 12 protection functions can be configured.
The load imposed on the protection and measuring unit (DSP) by the
protection functions is a maximum of 100%.
A maximum of 120 protection parameters can be configured.

All three requirements will also be checked by the configuration software. If specific
protection functions cannot be configured, please check the basic setting and the
device configuration in the configuration software. Some functions can only be used
under specific conditions, which can be found in the function block descriptions.
Frequency ranges of the protection functions
Unless otherwise specified, all protection functions operate either at 50 or 60 Hz.

Caution If frequency variations of more than ± 0.5 Hz occur in the protected

network, the precision of the protection response will be reduced.

Please note that the above information is particularly applicable to networks with low
frequency stability such as island networks. For example, the frequency imprecisions
affect the power calculation as follows:
If the output frequency of 50 or 60 Hz deviates by 5 Hz up or down, a deviation of
± 10 % in the power calculation will result.
Direct output channel
One binary output channel each, over which, for example, the trip signal is fed to the
power circuit-breaker, can be set in the configuration dialog for the protection
functions. This guarantees the fastest possible tripping. For documentation purposes
the output must also be made via a switching object in the function chart. If the trip si-
gnal is only forwarded over the FUPLA, the period between the generation of the trip
signal and the tripping may be significantly longer. The operating time of the signal
then depends directly on the cycle time of the application. The direct output channel is
also referred to as the interrupt channel.

Blocking of protection function

When a protection function is blocked (connection pin BI or BS), the messages, such
as start, are also fully blocked. Messages are no longer generated for the station
control system.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 139 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.8 Current Protection

4.4.8.1 Inrush
Connections:

Figure 108: Function block inrush current blocking

BS input: A logical 1 signal on this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Typical application
When switching on transformers or starting large motors, high switch-on inrush cur-
rents occur because of the non-linear magnetizing characteristic. These high currents
are limited in time.
The inrush current blocking can also be used to prevent the current protection
functions described at the beginning from being tripped.
Configuration

Figure 109: Configuration dialog function block inrush current blocking.

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 140 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Entry field N: It is the multiplier for the trip threshold of the definite time high protection
function overcurrent high.
Setting range: 2.00 … 8.00 (increment 0.1)
Default: 2.0

Entry field M: It is the multiplier for the trip threshold of the definite time of the
protection function overcurrent low.
Setting range: 3.00 … 4.00 (increment 0.1)
Default: 3.0

Entry field time: The total time in ms in which the inrush current blocking is activated.
It is referred to as tESB in previous examples. Once this time has expired, the
protection function is automatically deactivated and the previously blocked protection
functions operate with their set parameters.
Setting range: 230 …100 000 ms (increment 10)
Default: 250 ms

Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping.
The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is underlined
in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.2 Overcurrent directional high

Figure 110: Function block overcurrent directional high.

Connections:

BA input: A logical 1 signal on this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 141 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

BS input: A logical 1 signal on this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

AR output: A logical 1 signal appears at this output when an autoreclosure attempt is

active and running.

BO output: If the protection function detects an activation in the opposite direction to

the set tripping direction, a logical 1 signal will be output. It can be used for directional
comparison protection.
Configuration

Figure 111: Configuration dialog function block overcurrent directional high.

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.20

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded and the
tripping direction conforms to the parameter setting.
Setting range: 80 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 142 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The direction in which the
protection function should trip is marked here. The angular definition between voltage
and current and the connection of the REF542plus are important here.
Setting range: Forward, backward
Default: backwards

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Input field output channel: Input of the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is
underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button autoreclosure: The configuration dialog for setting parameters for the auto-
reclosure is opened.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.3 Overcurrent directional low

Figure 112: Function block overcurrent directional low.

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

BO output: If the protection function detects an activation in the opposite direction to

the set tripping direction, a logical 1 signal will be output. It can be used for directional
comparison protection.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 143 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 113: Configuration block overcurrent directional low.

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.20

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded and the
tripping direction conforms to the parameter setting.
Setting range: 80 ms …300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The parameters for the di-
rection in which the protection function should trip are set here. The angular definition
between voltage and current and the connection of the REF542plus are important
here.
Setting range: Forward, backward
Default: backwards

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Input field output channel: Input of the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is
underlined in white in the relevant function block.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 144 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)

Default: 0

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.4 Overcurrent instantaneous

Figure 114: Function block overcurrent instantaneous

Connections
BA input: A logical 1 signal on this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).

BS input: A logical 1 signal on this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

AR output: A logical 1 signal appears on this output when an autoreclosure attempt is

active and running.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 145 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 115: Configuration dialog function block Overcurrent instantaneous I>>>

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 30 ms …300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is
underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button autoreclosure: The configuration dialog for setting parameters for the auto-
reclosure is opened.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 146 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.5 Overcurrent high

Figure 116: Function block overcurrent high

Connections:

BA input: A logical 1 signal at this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

AR output: A logical 1 signal appears at this output when an autoreclosure attempt is

active and running.

Configuration

Figure 117: Configuration dialog function block overcurrent high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 147 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.05

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 50 ms …300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping.

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button autoreclosure: The configuration dialog for setting parameters for the auto-
reclosure is opened.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.6 Overcurrent low

Figure 118: Function block overcurrent low

Connections:
BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.
SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 148 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 119: Configuration dialog function block overcurrent low

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.05
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 35 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms
Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0.
Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 149 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.7 IDMT

Figure 120: IDMT protection

Connections:
BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.
SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 121: Configuration dialog function block IDMT

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 150 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Option field IDMT type: The desired current-time characteristic for tripping is marked
here.
Setting range: normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, long-term inverse
Default: normal inverse
Input field I/In (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the fault current factor ( =
I/IEB.). After reaching 1.14 times the value, the protection function is activated.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.1
Input field k (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the curve parameter according
to the BS 142 formula. One curve is selected from the family of curves with this.
Setting range: 0.05 … 1.50 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.05
Input field output channel: Input of the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Option field used sensors:Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.8 Earth fault high

Figure 122: Function block earthfault high

Connections:
BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.
BA input: A logical 1 signal at this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).
AR output: A logical 1 signal appears at this output when an autoreclosure attempt is
active and running.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 151 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

St output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function is
started.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period..REF542plus switchbay control and
protection unit.

Configuration

Figure 123: Configuration dialog function block earth fault high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.1
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 65 ms … 100 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 200
Input field output channel: Input of the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 152 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Button autoreclosure: The configuration dialog for setting parameters for the
autoreclosure is opened.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.9 Earthfault low

Figure 124: Function block earhfault low

Connections:
BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.
Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection
function is started.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 125: Configuration dialog function block earthfault low

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 153 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.1
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 65 ms … 100 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 200
Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.10 Earthfault directional high

Figure 126: Function block earth fault directional high

Connections:
BA input: A logical 1 signal at this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).
BI input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the protection function trip signal will be
suppressed. The functions on the tripping side will still be displayed.
St output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function is
started.
BO output: If the protection function detects an activation in the opposite direction to
the set tripping direction, a logical 1 signal will be output.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 154 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages ex-
ceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
AR output: A logical 1 signal appears at this output when an autoreclosure attempt is
active and running.

Configuration

Figure 127: Configuration dialog function block earth fault directional high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.10
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded and the
tripping direction conforms to the parameter setting.
Setting range: 35 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 200
Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The direction in which the
protection function should trip is marked here. The angular definition between voltage
and current and the connection of the REF542plus are important here.
Setting range: Forward, backward
Default: backwards

Option field Nettype: Specifies how the network neutral point is treated and what
zero-power proportion (effective or reactive power) the function draws on to
determine the direction.
Setting range: isolated (sin ϕ), earthed (cos ϕ)
Default: isolated (sin ϕ)

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 155 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.
Input field output channel: Input of the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0.
Information field BS: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Button autoreclosure: The configuration dialog for setting parameters for the
autoreclosure is opened.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.11 Earthfault directional low

Figure 128: Function block earthfault directional low

Connections:
BI Input: If there is a logical 1 at this input, the protection function trip signal will be
suppressed. The functions on the tripping side will still be displayed.
Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection
function is started.
BO output: If the protection function detects an activation in the opposite direction to
the set tripping direction, a logical 1 signal will be output.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 156 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 129: Configuration dialog function block earthfault directional low

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.10
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded and the
tripping direction conforms to the parameter setting.
Setting range: 35 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 200.
Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The direction in which the
protection function should trip is marked here. The angular definition between voltage
and current and the connection of the REF542plus are important here.
Setting range: Forward, backward
Default: backwards
Option field Nettype: Specifies how the network neutral point is treated and what
zero-power proportion (effective or reactive power) the function draws on to
determine the direction.
Setting range: isolated (sin ϕ), earthed (cos ϕ)
Default: isolated (sin ϕ)
Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 157 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Information field BS: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.8.12 Earthfault directional sensitive

Figure 130: Function block Earthfault directional sensitive

Connections
BI input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The funcion is still displayed on the tripping page.
Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection
function is started.
BO output: If the protection function detects a starting in the opposite direction to the
set tripping direction, a logical 1 signal will be sent to this output. In this case, the
function does not wait for the time delay to expire.
Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 158 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 131: Configuration dialog function block earthfault directional sensitive

Information field Field Bus Address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field current Io (once per parameter set): Input of the multiplier for In to
specify the response time for the ground current IE of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.050 … 2.000 (increment: 0.001)
Default: 1.000
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded and the
tripping direction conforms to the parameter setting.
Setting range: 115 ms … 10 000 ms (increment: 1)
Default: 1000
Input field angle alpha (once per parameter set): Angular setting for increasing
the opening angle of the response characteristic to retain clear directional decisions.
Setting range: 0.0 … 20.0° (increment: 0.1)
Default: 20°
Input field angle delta (once per parameter set): Angular setting for definition of
the network neutral point handling.
Setting range: -180.0 … 180.0° (increment: 0.1)
Default: 0°.
Input field voltage Uo (once per parameter set): Input of the multiplier for Un to
specify the response time for the ground current IE of the protection function. This
refers to the reference quantity of the neutral voltage!
Setting range: 0.05 … 0.70 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.5
Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a
switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
direct tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 159 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

Sensitive earthfault protection

88 E0 Start E1 Start back
88 E6 Trip E7 Trip back
88 E12 Trip block E13 Trip block back
88 E18 Protection block E19 Protection block back

4.4.8.13 Earthfault IDMT

Figure 132: Function block earthfault IDMT

Connections:
BS input: If a logical 1 acts on this input, the protection function trip signal will be
suppressed. However, the functions on the tripping side will still be displayed.
Start output: In the residual current an activation occurs and is documented at this
output with a logical 1 signal so long as the residual current function remains active.
TRIP output: An activation criterion together with expiry of the set time delay has re-
sulted in a tripping and generated a logical 1 signal here so long as the tripping crite-
rion is present. This signal is used to control the power circuit-breaker OFF command.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 160 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 133: Configuration dialog function block earthfault IDMT

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Option field IDMT type: The desired current-time characteristic for tripping is marked
here.
Setting range: normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, long-term inverse
Default: normal inverse
Input field I/In (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the fault current factor (=I
/I EB ). After reaching 1.14 times the value the protection function is activated.
Setting range: 0.05 … 40.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.5
Input field k (once per parameter set/setting): Yields the multiplication factor
according to the BS 142 formula. One of the curves from the family of curves is
selected with it.
Setting range: 0.05 … 1.50 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.5
Input field output channel: Input the number of the binary output for the direct
output signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via a swit-
ching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of direct
tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is
underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0
Option field used sensors: Selects the analog measuring inputs to which the
transducers/ sensors to whose values the protection function reacts are connected.
Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 161 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.
Button events A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9 Voltage Protection

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Voltage Protection.

4.4.9.1 Overvoltage instantaneous

Figure 134: Function block overvoltage instantaneous

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 162 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 135: Configuration dialog function block overvoltage instantaneous

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 3.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 30 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping.
The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA. It is underlined
in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 163 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.2 Overvoltage high

Figure 136: Function block overvoltage high

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Configuration

Figure 137: Configuration dialog function block overvoltage high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 3.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 164 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.3 Overvoltage low

Figure 138: Function block overvoltage low

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 165 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 139: Configuration dialog function block overvoltage low protection

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 3.00 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms…300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … [number of binary outputs] (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 166 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.4 Undervoltage instantaneous

Figure 140: Function block undervoltage instantaneous

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip
signal. The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Configuration

Figure 141: Configuration dialog function block undervoltage instantaneous

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Option field lowest voltage = 0 used: If this is marked, the voltage range from
0 to 40% of the start value will be taken into account.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 167 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 1.20 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 60 ms… 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.5 Undervoltage high

Figure 142: Function block undervoltage high

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip
signal. The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 168 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 143: Configuration dialog function block undervoltage high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Option field lowest voltage = 0 used: If this is marked, the voltage range from
0 to 40% of the start value will be taken into account.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 1.20 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 169 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.6 Undervoltage low

Figure 144: Function block undervoltage low protection

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 145: Configuration dialog function block undervoltage low protection

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 170 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Option field lowest voltage = 0 used: If this is marked, the voltage range from
0 to 40% of the start value will be taken into account.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.10 … 1.20 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms …300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 80 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.7 Residual overvoltage high

Figure 146: Function block residual overvoltage high

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 171 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 147: Configuration dialog function block residual overvoltage high

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for UN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 3 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 50 ms… 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 50 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 172 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.9.8 Residual overvoltage low

Figure 148: Function block residual overvoltage low

Connections

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Configuration

Figure 149: Configuration dialog function block residual overvoltage low

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 173 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN
to specify the response time of the protection function.
Setting range: 0.05 … 3 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 50 ms …300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 50 ms

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration software. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration software. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.10 Motor Protection

The subsections The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that
are available via the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Motor Protection.

4.4.11 Thermal overload protection

Figure 150: Function block thermal overload protection

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 174 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

WARN output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the warning
temperature is exceeded.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 151: Configuration dialog function block thermal overload protection

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and
used to address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field T nom: Input of the operating temperature in °C of the equipment to be

protected.
Setting range: 50 …400 °C (increment: 1)
Default: 100 °C

Input field I nom: Input of the rated current of the equipment to be protected.
Setting range: 1…10 000 A (increment: 1)
Default: 10 A

Input field ini. Temp.: Input of the start temperature as a percentage of the opera-
ting temperature of the equipment to be protected.
Setting range: 50 … 120% · T nom (increment: 1)
Default: 50%

Input field Time const. I < 0.1 Ie: Input of the cooling time constant of the
equipment to be protected. It is active if the current I < 0.10 · I nom.
Setting range: 10…20 000 s (increment: 1)
Default: 500 s

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 175 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Time const. normal: Input of the standard operating time constant of
the equipment to be protected.
It is active if the current is in the range 0.10 to 2.00 · I nom.
Setting range: 10…20 000 s (increment: 1 s)
Default: 500 s

Input field Time const. I > 2Ie: Input of the time constant for starting or mal-
function. It is active if the current is I > 2.00 · I nom.
Setting range: 10…20 000 s (increment: 1)
Default: 500 s

Input field Max. temp.: Input of the trip threshold. If it is exceeded for at least the set
delay period, a trip signal will be generated (Start).
Setting range: 20 … 400 °C (increment: 1)
Default: 100°C

Input field Warn temp.: Input of the threshold for the warning event. If the threshold
is exceeded, a logical 1 can be tapped at the WARN output.
Setting range: 20 … 400 °C (increment: 1)
Default: 100°C

Input field enviro. temp.: Input of the typical ambient temperature.

Setting range: 20 …T nom · T ini (increment: 1)
Default: 50

Input field Op. time: Delay period in ms after which the protection function trips if
the trip threshold T max remains exceeded.
Setting range: 1.03…1000 s (increment: 1)
Default: 50 s

Input field Node Sequence number: Shows the node number at which the function
is registered in the LON process bus interface.

Input field SensorNr into node: Selects the sensor input to whose value the
protection function is to react on the registered node in the LON process bus
interface.

Input field Output Channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field Used Sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field Pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button Events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 176 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.12 Motor start

Figure 152: Function block motor start

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

BO output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the motor starts correctly.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Configuration

Figure 153: Configuration dialog function block motor start

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field motorcurrent Ie: Input of the multiplier for In to specify the motor
current Ie.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 177 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: 0.30 … 1.20 (increment: 0.01)

Default: 1.00

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field startvalue Is (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier
for Ie to specify the response time of the protection function. The upper limit of the
setting range is set dynamically by the configuration program in accordance with the
formula below.
Setting range: 1.0 … 20·Ie (increment: 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 10 000

Input field motor start (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for
Ie to specify the motor starting current from which the starting supervision protection
function will be activated.
Setting range: 0.6 ... 0.8 Is (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.7

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.13 Blocking rotor

Figure 154: Function block blocking rotor

Connections:

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 178 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page. This input is assigned by the
speed indicator signal.

SL1, SL2, SL3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the
protection function is started through the L1, L2 or L3 conductors.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Typical application
This protection function is used to monitor the starting characteristics of three-phase
asynchronous motors to check whether the rotor braking is on and that which is
causing the motor to speed up. If this malfunction occurs, the starting current would
flow permanently and the motor would be thermally overloaded.

Configuration

Figure 155: Configuration dialog function block blocking rotor

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field motorcurrent Ie: Input of the multiplier for In to specify the motor cur-
rent Ie.
Setting range: 0.30 … 1.20 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 179 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field start value Is (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier
for Ie to specify the response time of the protection function. The upper limit of the
setting range is set dynamically by the configuration program in accordance with the
formula below.
Setting range: 1.0 ... 20·Ie (increment: 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 80 ms … 300 000 ms (increment: 10)
Default: 10 000

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.14 Number of starts

Figure 156: Function block number of starts

Connections:

BI input: A logical 1 at this input will suppress the protection function trip signal. The
function on the tripping side will still be displayed.

SI input: A logical 1 signal at this input increases the number of cold or warm starts
(depending on the evaluation) by one. The input reacts to the rising slope.

WARN output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is activated.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Typical application
Supervision the number of starts of three-phase asynchronous motors, because in
most cases when the motor starts the rotor reaches a critical temperature.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 180 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 157: Configuration dialog function block number of starts

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field No. of warm starts (once per parameter set/setting): The allowable
number of warm starts is entered here.
No. setting range: 1 … 10 (increment: 1)
Default: 1

Input field No. of cold starts (once per parameter set/setting): The allowable
number of cold starts is entered here.
No. setting range: 1…10 (increment: 1)
Default: 1

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the reset period after the
expiry of which the number of cold or warm starts is reduced by one.
Setting range: 1.03…7200 s (increment: 1)
Default: 30 s

Input field temperature for warm start (once per parameter set/setting): Input
of the temperature limit value for distinguishing between a cold or a warm start.
Setting range: 20 … 200 °C (increment: 1)
Default: 80 °C

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 181 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.15 Distance protection

Figure 158: Function block distance protection

Connections:

BI input: A logical 1 on this input will suppress the protection function trip signal. The
function on the tripping side will still be displayed.

BA input: A logical 1 signal on this input blocks the autoreclosure (AR).

CB OK input: A logical 1 signal on this input signals the function block that the power
circuit-breaker is ready for the autoreclosure.

SIGNAL COMP input: A logical 1 signal at this input signals the function block that the
pair of pilot wires for the signal comparison protection is not broken.

1. AR /2. AR outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here when the function
block trips the first or second autoreclosure cycle. These signals must be linked with
the LS ON command.

AR output: A logical 1 signal appears at this output when an autoreclosure attempt is

active and running.

< Z1 output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here when the fault impedance is less
than the first impedance zone.

START L1, START L2, START L3 outputs: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here
so long as the protection function is started by the corresponding conductor.

EARTH START output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here when a fault with earth
contact has been detected.

GENERAL START output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here when a fault in the sy-
stem has been detected.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 182 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 159: Configuration dialog function block distance protection

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Option field net type: The type of neutral treatment of the system to be monitored is
marked here. The setting influences the consideration of the earth current when
selecting the phase for the undervoltage-controlled overcurrent starting.
High-ohmic earthing: Networks with isolated neutral point or earth fault compen-
sation.
Low-ohmic earthing: Networks with low-ohmic neutral earthing. The neutral point
is connected with the earth directly or via a earth resistance or a earth reactance.

Note In networks with short-term low-ohmic earthing the network type "low-ohmic
earthing" should be selected.

Option field earth start: How the earth fault current starting is included in the ge-
neral starting is marked here.
IE> used: An earth fault current starting (EARTH START) results in the general
starting or GENERAL START
IE> unused: The general starting is not derived from a earth fault current starting.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 183 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Note The IE> used selection should generally not be used.

Option field used sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection

function.

Option field ct grounding: Whether the current transformer is earthed on the

feeder (line) side or the busbar side is marked here.
The definition of the forward direction for determining the direction of the impedance
and the directional backup starting zones depends on this. It is important for the set
earthing point to conform to the connection diagram.

Option field switching onto faults: How the distance protection responds to a
switching on an existing fault is marked here.
Normal behaviour: The fault is tripped in accordance with the set impedance-time
characteristic.
Overreach zone used: The first impedance zone is switched over to the
overreach zone for a short time to enable a fault on the entire line unit to be
tripped quickly.
Trip after occurance of general start: An immediate trip occurs if a starting occurs
immediately after the closure.

Note The setting "Overreach zone used“ should be preferred so the discrimination
is guaranteed and a fault at the end of the line unit is always detected.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field signalcomp. time set 1/set 2: Input of the time in ms for
implementing the underlying signal comparison protection. This binary input SIGNAL
COMP is used to query the signal status from the remote side. The signals derived in
the distance protection, general starting (GENERAL START) and tripping in zone 1 (<
Z1), can be used to derive the tripping after comparison with the remote side over the
pair of pilot wires. A time can be input for every parameter set.
Setting range: 30…30 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30

Button Startvalues: The configuration dialog for setting the starting values is ope-
ned.

Button Phaseselection: The configuration dialog for setting the conductor prefe-
rence is opened.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 184 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button Earthfactors: The configuration dialog for inputting the earth factors for
correcting the impedance determination in the event of faults with earth contact is
opened.

Button Zones: The configuration dialog for inputting the impedance zones is opened.

Button Autoreclose: The configuration dialog for autoreclosure of the distance pro-
tection is opened. The button can only be selected when the autoreclosure function
has been activated in the REF542plus basic settings.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

Start values configuration dialog

Figure 160: Configuration dialog starting values, function block distance protection

Input field I> (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN to define
the overcurrent starting threshold.
Setting range: 0.05…4.00 *In(increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field I0> (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In to define
the earth fault current starting threshold.
Setting range: 0.05…4.00 *In (increment 0.01)
Default: 0.20

Input field UF< (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for IN to define
the undervoltage starting threshold.
Setting range: 0.05…0.90 *Un (increment 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Input field IF> (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for In to specify
the voltage-controlled overcurrent starting threshold.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 185 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: 0.05…4.00 *In (increment 0.01)

Default: 0.50

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Phase selection configuration dialog

Figure 161: Input screen for setting the phase selection

Option range parameter set 1/parameter set 2: The definition of the conductor prefe-
rence for determining the impedance in the event of the cross-country fault for net-
works with high-resistance earthing is marked here for the specific parameter set.

• normal acycle L3-L1-L2

• normal acycle L3-L1-L2-L3

• inverse acycle L1-L3-L2

• inverse acycle L3-L2-L1-L3

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Note The conductor preference can be used to secure selective tripping of the
earth fault footing point only if all distance protection units in the entire
network have identical conductor preference. Because in many cases they
have to operate with electromechanical protection equipment, the acyclical
conductor preference L3 before L1 before L2 should be used.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 186 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Earth factors configuration dialog

Figure 162: Earth factors configuration dialog

Input field factor k (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the amplitude of the
complex earth factor.
Setting range: 0.00…10.00 (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00

Input field angle k (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle of the
complex earth factor.
Setting range: -60 … 60° (increment 1)
Default: 0°

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Note Because only one earth factor is provided in the distance protection, for
reasons of selectivity the earth factor must taken from the zero-sequence and
positive-sequence impedance of the first impedance zone Z1.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 187 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Autoreclosure configuration dialog

Figure 163: Autoreclosure times configuration dialog

Every column of input fields is used to set parameters of the various quantities for a
parameter set.

Input field nr. of recloses (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the number
of autoreclosure cycles that must be run.
Setting range: 0, 1 or 2
Default: 0

Input field time tspec1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the first fault time
in ms.
Setting range: 30…300 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 100 ms

Input field time tp1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the first dead time in
ms.
Setting range: 30…300 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 100 ms

Input field time tspec2 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the second fault
time in ms.
Setting range: 30…300 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 100 ms

Input field time tp 2(once per parameter set/setting): Input of the second dead time
in ms.
Setting range: 30…300 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 100 ms

Input field time treclaim (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the blocking
time in ms.
Setting range: 30…300 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 100 ms

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 188 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Selecting the zone configuration dialog

Figure 164: Selecting the zone configuration dialog

Input field cablereactance: Input of the value in Ω/km for calculation of the fault di-
stance.
Setting range: 0.05…120 Ω/km (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω/km

Input field overheadlinereactance: Input of the value in Ω/km for calculation of

the fault distance.
Setting range: 0.05…120 Ω/km (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω/km

Input field border cable overhead: Input of the correction value in Ω for calcula-
tion of the fault distance in a mixed line unit.
Setting range: 0.05…120 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field type of power transmission line: The line unit combination for
the first impedance zone is defined here.
Only cable
Only overhead
Overhead before cable: The line unit of the first impedance zone consists of an
overhead cable and finally a cable section. This option is also used for autoreclo-
sure; it is only implemented in the range of the input autoreclosure blocking zone.
Cable before overhead : The line unit of the first impedance zone consists of a
cable and finally an overhead cable section. This option is also used for
autoreclosure; it is blocked in the range of the input autoreclosure blocking zone.

Buttons Zone 1, Zone 2 or Zone 3: The configuration dialog for setting the
specific impedance zone is opened.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 189 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button overreach zone: The configuration dialog for setting the overreach zone is
opened.

Button Autoreclose: The configuration dialog for setting the autoreclosure blocking
zone or unblocking zone is opened.

Button Direct. Backup: The configuration dialog for setting the directional backup
zone is opened.

Button Nondir. Backup: The configuration dialog for setting the non-directional
backup zone is opened.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Configuration dialogs zone 1, zone 2 and zone 3

Figure 165: Example of a configuration dialog for the zones of the function block distance
protection

Because the configuration dialogs for zones 1 to 3 have the same structure, they are
only described once here. The zones are specified by four lines in the impedance
level. The quantities that are to be input here can be found in the diagram in the
configuration dialog.

Input field resistance R (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω
for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the R-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 190 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field reactance X (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω for
limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the X-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field angle delta 1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
fourth quadrant.
Setting range: -45.00 … 0.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 0.00°

Input field angle delta 2 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in de-
grees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the se-
cond quadrant.
Setting range: 90.00 … 135.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 90.00°

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Setting the grading time in ms for
the corresponding impedance zone.
Setting range: 30 ms…30 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30 ms

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The activity and the input
direction of the first impedance zone are defined here.

Forward
Backward
Zone unused

Button R-X diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The zone is shown in a new
dialog window in accordance with the parameters in the impedance level.

Button t-Z diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The setting characteristic or
the impedance-time characteristic of the specific zone is shown in a new dialog win-
dow in accordance with the parameters.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 191 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Overreach zone configuration dialog

Figure 166: Overreach zone configuration dialog for the function block distance protection

Input field resistance R (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω
for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the R-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field reactance X (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω for
limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the X-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field angle delta 1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
fourth quadrant.
Setting range: -45.00 … 0.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 0.00°

Input field angle delta 2 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
second quadrant.
Setting range: 90.00 … 135.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 90.00°

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Setting the grading time in ms for
the corresponding impedance zone.
Setting range: 30 ms…100 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30 ms

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The activity and the input
direction of the first impedance zone are defined here.
Forward

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 192 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Backward
Zone unused

Button R-X diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The zone is shown in a new
dialog window in accordance with the parameters in the impedance level.

Button t-Z diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The setting characteristic or
the impedance-time characteristic of the specific zone is shown in a new dialog
window in accordance with the parameters.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Autoreclosure blocking zone configuration dialog

Figure 167: Configuration dialog autoreclosure blocking zone 1

Input field resistance R (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω
for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the R-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field reactance X (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the value in Ω for
limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone on the X-axis.
Setting range: 0.05…120.00 Ω (increment 0.01)
Default: 1.00 Ω

Input field angle delta 1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
fourth quadrant.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 193 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Setting range: -45.00 … 0.00° (increment 0.01)

Default: 0.00°

Input field angle delta 2 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
second quadrant.
Setting range: 90.00 … 135.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 90.00°

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Setting the grading time in ms for
the corresponding impedance zone.
Setting range: 30 ms…100 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30 ms

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The activity and the input
direction of the first impedance zone are defined here.
Forward
Backward
Zone unused

Button R-X diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The zone is shown in a new
dialog window in accordance with the parameters in the impedance level.

Button t-Z diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The setting characteristic or
the impedance-time characteristic of the specific zone is shown in a new dialog
window in accordance with the parameters.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 194 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration dialog for the directional backup protection

Figure 168: Configuration dialog for the directional backup protection of the function block
distance protection

Input field angle delta 1 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
fourth quadrant.
Setting range: -45.00 … 0.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 0.00°

Input field angle delta 2 (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the angle in
degrees for limiting the tripping surface of the corresponding impedance zone in the
second quadrant.
Setting range: 90.00 … 135.00° (increment 0.01)
Default: 90.00°

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Setting the grading time in ms for
the corresponding impedance zone.
Setting range: 30 …100 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30 ms

Option field direction (once per parameter set/setting): The activity and the input
direction of the first impedance zone are defined here.
Forward
Backward
Zone unused

Button R-X diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The zone is shown in a new
dialog window in accordance with the parameters in the impedance level.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 195 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button t-Z diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The setting characteristic or
the impedance-time characteristic of the specific zone is shown in a new dialog win-
dow in accordance with the parameters.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.
Configuration dialog for the non-directional backup protection

Figure 169: Configuration dialog for the non-directional backup protection of the function block
distance protection

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Setting the grading time in ms for
the corresponding impedance zone.
Setting range: 30 …100 000 ms (increment 1)
Default: 30

Button R-X diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The zone is shown in a new
dialog window in accordance with the parameters in the impedance level.

Button t-Z diagram (once per parameter set/setting): The setting characteristic or
the impedance-time characteristic of the specific zone is shown in a new dialog
window in accordance with the parameters.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 196 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.16 Differential Protection

Figure 170: Functionblock differential protection

Connections:
BL Input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as sson as the trip condition according to the
tripping characteristic is fulfilled.

BH2 Output: Becomes logical 1, if blocking parameter by the 2nd harmonic is activated
and the threshold value referred to the nominal current is exceeded.

BH5 Output: Becomes logical 1, if blocking parameter by the 5th harmonic is activated
and the threshold value referred to the nominal current is exceeded.

GB Output: Becomes logical 1, if logical signal 1 from BH2 or BH5 has occured

Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 197 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

General

Figure 171: General configuration dialog, function block differential protection

Information field Fieldbus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Informationsfield Uses Sensors: This field describes, how the current transformers
or the current sensors must be located on the primary and secondary side of the
protected transformer. In case of motor or generator protection it is similar to proceed.
For example the primary side is the feeder side and the secondary side is the the side
of the winding star point.

Inputfield Transformergroup: Input of the the vector group to compensate the

phase shifting between the primary and secondary side of the protected transformer.
Setting range: 0 ... 11 (increment: 1 equal to 30° phase shift)
Default: 0

Optionfield Transformer arthing: Here the side of the transformer, which is

earthed, is to be marked. If a special earthing transformer is used and placed in the
protecttion zone, then this earthing has to be taken into onsideration also.
Input field Output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 16 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 198 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Current

Figure 172: Current configuration dialog, function block differential protection

Input field Primary nominal current (once per parameter set/setting): Input of
the nominal current on the primary side of the power transformers
Setting range: 0.00 … 100,000.00 A (Increment: 0,01)
Default: 100.00
Input field Secondary nominal current (once per parameter set/setting): Input
of the nominal current on the secondary side of the power transformers
Setting range: 0.00 … 100,000.00 A (Increment: 0,01)
Default: 100.00
Input field Threshold current (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the
thresholdvalue at through current equal to zero according to the tripping
characteristic.
Setting range: 0.10 … 0.50 In (Increment: 0,01)
Default: 0.20

Input field unbiased region limit (once per parameter set/setting): Setting
value to limit the horizontal tripping characteristic respectively the first fold of the
tripping characteristic.
Setting ranfe: 0.50 … 5.00 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50
Input field Slightly biased region threshold (once per parameter
set/setting): Input of the threshold value on the second fold of the tripping
characteristic.
Setting range: 0.20 … 2.00 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.20
Inputfield Slightly biased region limit ID2 (once per parameter
set/setting): Definition of the limitation of second fold of the tripping characteristic.
Setting range: 1.00 … 10.00 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 3.00

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 199 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Heavily biased slope (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the
slope for the tripping characteristic between the second and the third fold.
Setting range: 0.40 … 1.00 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.40
Input field Trip by Id> (once per parameter set/setting): Value of the third fold of
the tripping characteristic by an overcurrent limitatation.
Setting range: 0.50 … 5.00 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.50

Harmonics

Figure 173: Harmonics configuration dialog, function block differential protection

Parameter field of the Second Harmonic: Parameter for stabilization respectively

for the blocking of protection functions by the 2nd Harmonic.
Input field Threshold (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the 2nd harmonic
sesitivity related to the nominal current of the power transformer
Setting range: 0.10 … 0.30 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default:: 0.30
Option field Block (once per parameter set/setting): Enable the blocking of the
protection function, if the threshold value is exceeded.
Parameter field of the Fifth Harmonic: Parameter for stabilization respectively for
the blocking of protection functions by the 5th Harmonic.
Inputfield Threshold (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the 5th harmonic
sensitivity related to the nominal current of the power transformer
Setting range: 0.10 … 0.30 In (Increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.30
Optionfield Block (once per parameter set/setting): Enable the blocking of the
protection function, if the threshold value is exceeded.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 200 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Events

Figure 174: Events configuration dialog, function block differential protection

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ... 7,
18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 ... E0 and E31 ... E16: The marking of events
is also possible here. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not used from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimal code in the input
fields.
The following table shows an overview of the events of the differential protection
function block.

Differential Protection
79 E6 Trip started E7 Trip back
79 E12 Trip block started E13 Trip block back
79 E18 Protection block started E19 Protection block back
nd
79 E20 Block 2 harmonic started E21 Block 2nd harmonic back
79 E24 Block 5th harmonic started E25 Block 5th harmonic back
79 E26 General bock started E27 General bock back

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 201 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about pins

Figure 175: Information dialog Pins, function block differential protection

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information whether the
pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.17 Other functions

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Other Protection.

4.4.17.1 Thermal supervision

Not supported anymore

4.4.17.2 Unbalanced load

Figure 176: Function block unbalanced load

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 202 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections
BS Input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.
RST Input: A logical 1 signal at this input resets the memory contents of the
protection function into normal condition.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here as long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as the trip condition is fulfilled

BO output: Change into logical signal 1 until the reset timer is expired. During the
reset time period, the memory content is decremented linearly.

Configuration
The following subsection describe the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 177: General configuration dialog, function block unbalanced load protection

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Option field used sensors: Selects the analog measuring inputs to which the
current transducers/sensors are connected.

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 203 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 16 (increment: 1)
Default: 1

Parameter

Figure 178: Parameter configuration dialog, function block unbalanced load protection

Input field Is (once per parameter set/setting): Setting of the allowed unbalanced
load current related to the nominal current of the current transformers or current
sensors.
Setting range: 0,05 … 0,30 In (Increment: 0,01)
Default: 0,10

Input field K (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the constant K to define the
heating of the protected component.
Setting range: 2,0 … 30,0 (Increment: 0,1)
Default: 10,0
Input field Reset time (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the reset time to
reduce the content of the heating memory linearly to zero again. If the memory
content is not equal to zero, the switching of the motor can be blocked.
Setting range: 0 … 2000 s (Increment: 1)
Default: 60

Input field Time decreasing rate (once per parameter set/setting): Additional
percentage reduction of the reset time if desired.
Setting range: 0, … 100 (Increment: 1)
Deafult:: 10

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 204 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Events

Figure 179: Events configuration dialog, function block unbalanced load protection

The main part in the configuration dialog is the list of events. The channel number
over which the events are sent is shown in the left column near to the checkbox. To
enable the individual events to be transmitted to the substation automation system,
transmission of events must be generally enabled.
The events of the function block power factor controller must also be enabled. Mark
the adjacent checkbox so the event will be generated and sent as required.
Button Set All: All events are marked and generated and sent as required.
Butte Clear All: No event is marked.
Button Set Default: The default configuration for events is used. The events 0 ... 7,
18, 19 and 24 ... 27 are marked.
Input fields Event Masks E15 … E0 and E31 … E16: The marking of events is
also possible here. The input must be in hexadezimal code and the following table
shows how it works for the events E0 to E15. The input for the events E16 to E31 is
principle similar. The events 28 to 31 are not use from this function block.
If you mark the checkboxes in the list you can read the hexadecimal code in the input
fields.
The following table shows an overview of the events of the function block unbalanced
load protection.

Unbalanced load protection

75 E0 Start started E1 Start back
75 E6 Trip started E7 Trip back
75 E12 Trip block started E13 Trip block back
79 E18 Protection block started E19 Protection block back

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 205 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about pins

Figure 180: Information dialog Pins, function block unbalanced load protection

You can see a list of connections on the function block and you can reach information
about the wire number connected to the pin. There is also information whether the pin
is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or
2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.17.3 Directional power

Figure 181: Function block directional power

Connections
BI input: A logical 1 at this input will suppress the protection function trip signal. The
function on the tripping side will still be displayed.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 206 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 182: Configuration dialog function block directional power

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field Nom.RealPower: Input of the three-phase rated effective power of the
equipment that is to be monitored.
Setting range: 1…1 000 000 kW (increment: 1)
Default: 1000

Input field Max.Rev.Load: Input of the trip threshold in percent of the rated effective
power. The trip threshold is equivalent to the maximum allowable effective power
against the usual power direction.
Setting range: 1…50% of Pn (increment: 1)
Default: 5

Entry field Op.Time: Delay period in ms after which the protection function trips if the
response time (P max rev) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 1.03…1000 s (increment: 1)
Default: 10

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field direction: The direction is marked here in which the protection
function should trip; i.e. the direction is opposite to the usual power direction of the
equipment that is to be monitored.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 207 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.17.4 Low load

Figure 183: Function block low load supervision

Connections:

BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page. .

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here as long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.

Configuration

Figure 184: Configuration dialog function block low load

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 208 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Nom.RealPower: Input of the three-phase rated effective power of the
equipment that is to be monitored.
Setting range: 50…1 000 000 kW (increment: 1)
Default: 1000

Input field Min.Load: Input of the trip threshold in percent of the rated effective
power. The trip threshold is equivalent to the allowable minimum low load.
Setting range: 5…100% of Pn (increment: 1)
Default: 10

Input field Min.Current: Input of the minimum line current in percent of the rated
current that must flow in at least one conductor to activate the low load supervision
function block.
Setting range: 2…20% of In (increment: 1)
Default: 5

Input field Op.Time: Delay period in s after which the protection function trips if the
response time (P min) remains low.
Setting range: 1.03…1000 s (increment: 0.1)
Default: 10

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Option field used current phases: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the

protection function.

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.17.5 Frequency supervision

Figure 185: Function block frequency supervision

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 209 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections:
BS input: A logical 1 signal at this input suppresses the protection function trip signal.
The function is still displayed on the tripping page.

Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection function
is started.

Trip output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip threshold for the set period.
Typical application
Anywhere where time and frequency-dependent processes are involved, it is worthw-
hile checking the network frequency so it remains within set limits (generators, trans-
formers, chokes, three-phase machines and converters).
In addition, the frequency supervision enables the frequency variations to be docu-
mented.

Configuration

Figure 186: Configuration dialog function block frequency supervision

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field startvalue (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the frequency
difference in Hz around which the rated frequency can positively or negatively vary.
Setting range: 0.04…5.00 Hz (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.20

Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
supervision function trips if the start value (response time) remains exceeded.
Setting range: 1.03…300 s (increment: 0.01)
Default: 10

Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 210 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.

Setting range: 0 … 8 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.17.6 Synchrocheck

Figure 187: Function block Synchrocheck

Connections
BI input: A logical 1 at this input will suppress the protection function trip signal. The
function on the tripping side will still be displayed.
Start output: A logical 1 signal can be tapped here so long as the protection
function is started.
Syn output: Becomes logical 1 as soon as one of the three monitored voltages
exceeds the trip treshhold for the set period. The switching operation for coupling the
separate systems can be released with this signal.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 211 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 188: Configuration dialog function block synchrocheck

Information field interbay bus address: Set for every protection function and
used to address the function block for interbay bus commands.
Input field start value (once per parameter set/setting): Input of the multiplier for
U n to specify the response time of the protection function. The amplitude of the
allowable differential voltage is set here.
Setting range: 0.02 … 0.40 (increment: 0.01)
Default: 0.05
Input field time (once per parameter set/setting): Delay period in ms after which the
protection function trips if the start value and the phase difference remains exceeded.
Setting range: 0.52 … 1000.00 s (increment: 0.01)
Default: 100
Input field (phasendiff.) phase difference (once per parameter set/setting):
Input of the maximum phase difference between the networks that are to be coupled
or the maximum phase difference of the differential voltage.
Setting range: 5 … 50° (increment: 1)
Default: 10°
Input field output channel: Indicates the number of the binary output affected by
the direct trip signal. For safety and documentation the output must also be made via
a switching object in the function chart. Input of the value 0 suppresses the option of
faster tripping. The number of the selected binary output is also shown in the FUPLA
It is underlined in white in the relevant function block.
Setting range: 0 … 27 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 212 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.
Option field active sensors: Connects a sensor/transducer input to the protection
function.
Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.
Button events: A configuration dialog is opened. Mark (activate) the events that
should be sent to the station control system over the interbay bus. The button can
only be selected when the events function has been activated in the REF542plus
basic settings.

4.4.18 Fault recorder

Figure 189: Function block fault recorder

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 213 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Configuration

Figure 190: Example of a configuration dialog for the function block fault recorder

Input range analog signals: Various parameter settings that are important for re-
cording analog signals of every analog input:
Input fields name: Input of a name for the recorded analog signal of the input
whose number is before the field. This parameter is used by the processing
program to assign a physical quantity to the recorded signal.
Setting range: 0…10 characters (standard character set)
Default: Set in accordance with the use of the analog inputs
Input fields factor: Input of a scaling factor for the signals recorded at the spe-
cific input. This value is used by the processing program. There are no detailed
specifications for this factor in the COMTRADE format, in which the data is con-
verted by the configuration program. The input "1“ avoids any problems that might
occur.
Setting range: 0…1000 (increment: 1)
Default: Empty
Entry field unit: Input of a physical unit for the signal recorded at the specific
input. This value is used by the processing program.
Setting range: 0…3 characters (standard character set)
Default: Set in accordance with the use of the analog inputs

Input field time before fault: Input of the time in ms actually recorded before the
fault recorder is started.
Setting range: 100…2000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 100

Input field recording time: Input of the time in ms that should be used to record
fault records.
Setting range: 1000…5000 ms (increment: 1 ms)
Default: 2500

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 214 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field time after fault: Input of the time in ms actually recorded after the
fault recorder is started.
Setting range: 100…4900 ms (increment: 1ms)
Default: 1000

Input fields digital signals: A comment can be input here for every digital input
1 … 32 of the fault recorder. The comment is used by the processing program to link
the recorded signal and its origin.
Setting range: 0…8 characters (standard character set)
Default: “unused“

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

Button pins: Clicking this button opens a dialog window in which the connections of
the fault recorder are listed. The number of the terminal connection and the indication
of whether it is an input or output of the function block is adjacent. The connection
numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has
no connections made.
Click the OK button to close this dialog window.

4.4.19 Communication objects

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Communication Objects.

The following function block is used for vertical communication to the host with LON
per LAG 1.4. Also horizontal communication for interlocking between the bays is
possible. Detail information regarding the communication protocol is placed in part 4,
of the manuel in which all other possible communication protocols are described.

4.4.19.1 Binary Write

Figure 191: Function block binary write

Function
This function block is used for vertical communication in order to transmit the binary
information to the host. This function block must be updated by the interbay bus
during the configured time. After a time out the output valid and the 16 data-outputs
are reset with logical 0. After each new update the output valid is set back again to
logical 1. The default time is 1000 ms. If the time is set with 0, the time controlling is
not active, valid is permanently 1 and the output will never be reset.

Note A maximum of 32 binary write function block may be entered.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 215 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connection
Output 1 : Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the substation control
system.

Output VALID : Logical signal 1 is present, if the binary information has a valid
qualifier.

Configuration
The following subsection describes the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs
you can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 192: General configuration dialog, function block binary write

Information field: Field bus adress: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field Instance number: Number of the used function block, in total 64
function block instances are available.
Setting range: 1 … 32 [instance number] (Increment: 1)
Default: 1

Inputfield Refresh timeout period: time duration to be set for recognizing the
information from the host
Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms (Increment: 1)
Default: 1000

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 216 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about Pins

Figure 193: Information dialog Pins, function block binary write

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.2 16-Bit Write

Figure 194: Function block 16-bit write

Function
This function block is dedicated as well for the vertical communication to receive
RESERVE requests, RESERVE-confirmations as also for horizontal communication

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 217 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

to receive the interlocking-information from other bays. Each change of the inputs will
create an event with the port number of the changed input as its value information.
This function block must be updated by the interbay bus during the configured time.
After a time out the output valid and the 16 data-outputs are reset to logical 0. After
each new update the output valid is set back again to logical 1. The default time is
1000 ms. If the time is set to 0, the time controlling is not active, valid is permanently
1 and the output will never be reset.

Note A maximum of 64 16-bit write function block may be entered.

Connection
Output 1 … 16 : Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the substation
control system.

Output VALID : Logical signal 1 is present, if the binary information has a valid
qualifier.

Configuration
The following subsection describe the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 195: General configuration dialog, function block 16 bit write

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 218 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Instance number: Number of the used function block, in total 64
function block respectively instance are available.
Setting range: 1 … 64 [instance number] (Increment: 1)
Default: 1

Inputfield Refresh timeout period: time duration to be set for recognizing the
information from the host
Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms (Increment: 1)
Default: 1000

Information about Pins

Figure 196: Information dialog Pins, function block 16 bit write

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.3 Binary Read

Figure 197: Function block binary read

Function
This function block is used as vertical communication to read a binary information
transmitted by the host.

Note A maximum of 32 binary read function block may be entered.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 219 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connection
Input 1 : Connection of the logical signal that is to be read from the host within the
the substation control system.

Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 198: General configuration dialog, function block binary read

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field Instance number: Number of the used function block, in total 64
function block instances are available.
Setting range: 1 … 64 [instance number] (Increment: 1)
Default: 1

Information field event: 0->1: Input of the event number assigned to the event as
sent. The event is generated if the logical state at the input changes from 0 to 1 and is
sent via the related channel with the selected event number.

Information field event: 1->0: Input of the event number assigned to the event as
sent. The event is generated if the logical state at the input changes from 1 to 0 and is
sent via the related channel with the selected event number.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 220 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about Pins

Figure 199: Information dialog Pins, function block binary read

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also an information whether the
pin is an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one
input) or 2 (on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.4 16-Bit Read

Figure 200: Function block 16 bit read

Function
This function block is used as well for vertical communication to receive the
RESERVE-requests and RESERVE-confirmations transmitted by the host as also for

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 221 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

horizontal communication to receive the interlocking-information from other bays. All

changes of the inputs will create an event with the instance number of the changed
input as its value information.

Note A maximum of 32 binary read function block may be entered.

Connection
Input 1 … 16: Connection of the logical signal that is to be read from the host within
the the substation control system.

Configuration
The following subsection describes the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs
you can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 201: General configuration dialog, function block 16-bit read

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field Instance number: Number of the used function block, in total 64
function block instances are available.
Setting range: 1 … 64 [instance number] (Increment: 1)
Default: 1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 222 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field Delay time:

Setting range: 0 … 65000 ms
Default: 0

Information field Event E0 : The number of the event being used by the function
block.

Information about Pins

Figure 202: Information dialog Pins, function block binary read

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.5 Direct read-write

Figure 203: Function block direct read-write

Function
This function block enables logical signals to be exported from the function chart to a
station control system. Logical signals can also be sent in the reverse direction from
the control system to the function chart.

Note A maximum of 100 direct write-read commands may be entered.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 223 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Typical application
Implementing station-level interlocking over the interbay bus.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 224 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections

Input R: Connection of the logical signal that is to be sent to the station control
system.

Output W: Signalling output of the logical signal that the station control system will
send to the function chart.
Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 204: Configuration dialog function block direct read-write

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field signalnumber: Input of the signal number/event number over which a
logical signal is sent or received. Channel and signal/event number are also shown in
the function chart below the function block.
Setting range: 0…99 (increment: 1)
Default: Next free signal number

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 225 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about Pins

Figure 205: Information dialog Pins, function block binary read

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.6 Event generator

Figure 206: Function block event generator

Function
This function block generates an event if the state at the input changes from logical 0
to logical 1 or vice versa. This event can be processed by the station control system.

Note A maximum of 63 events can be generated with event generators, with every
event generator being able to transmit 2 events.

Typical application
Generating a real-time event for the substation control system, if a function block
does not provide a corresponding event.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 226 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Connections
Input left: Every change of the logical state generates an event.

Configuration
The following subsection describes the several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs
you can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

General

Figure 207: Configuration dialog function block event generator

Information field field bus address: Set for every protection function and used to
address the function block for interbay bus commands.

Input field event: 0->1: Input of the event number assigned to the event as sent.
The event is generated if the logical state at the input changes from 0 to 1 and is sent
via channel 100 (default) with the selected event number. The input "0“ prevents an
event from being transmitted.
Setting range: 0…63 (increment: 1)
Default: 0

Input field event: 1->0: Input of the event number assigned to the event as sent.
The event is generated if the logical state at the input changes from 1 to 0 and is sent
via channel 100 (default) with the selected event number. The input "1“ prevents an
event from being transmitted.
Setting range: 0 … 63 (increment: 1)
Default: 1

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 227 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Information about Pins

Figure 208: Information dialog Pins, function block event generator

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.19.7 Bay Reserve

Figure 209: Function block bay reserve

Function
The function block Bay Reserve is used to handle the SELECT/RESERVE
mechanism and is needed once per bay. A maximum of 8 switching devices can be

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 228 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

served by this function block. As well as the internal bay RESERVE-requests, the
RESERVE-requests from other bays can be processed.
Reservation request:
A switching device requires a reservation by putting a logical signal 1 on the related
input RES.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8). This request can be configured by the input INT.REQ.i (i
= 1 … 8) either only as an internal bay request or as a request, in which external bays
must also be taken into account.
Reservation confirmation:
The reservation will be granted, if the following conditions are fulfilled:
No switching devices have already asked for reservation
No reservation request is present
In case of an external bay reservation, all bays have already confirmed the
reservation

In case of granted reservation the output RES.GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8) for the switching

device, which is requesting the reservation, will change to locigal signal 1. The same
will happen with the output RESERVED. The reservation is then granted until the
reservation is reset by the corresponding switching device.
If an external reservation is configured by INT.RES.i (i = 1 … 8) = 0, the request will
be executed after the input GRANT FROM ANY is set to logical 0, which means that
all other bay reservations have been reset. Subsequently the output EXT.RES is set
to logical 1. This information must then be transmitted to the host of the substation
control system by the 16-bit read function block.
The bay reserve function block now waits for the logical signal 1 at the input GRANT
FROM ALL and the input GRANT VALID, which indicates the validity of the
information on the interbay bus.
Reservation request from other bays:
A logical 1 signal at the input of EXT.RES.REQ. shows a reservation request from
another bay: The bay must confirm the reservation and may not generate any bay
internal reservation any more. The bay confirms the reservation under the following
condition:
The bay is not internally or externally reserved
The input EXT.REQ.VALID is set to a logical 1 signal and indicates the validity
of the reservation on the interbay bus.
The reservation is confirmed, if the related output RES-GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8) becomes
a logical 1 signal. This information must then be transmitted by the interbay bus to the
external bay, which is requesting the reservation.

Connections
Input RES.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8): If a reservation of the assigned switching device
is requested, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.

Input INT.REQ.i (i = 1 … 8): If an external reservation for the assigned

switching device is needed, the input is set with a logical 1 signal. If only internal
reservation for the assigned switching device is needed, the input is set with a logical
0 signal.

Input GRANT FROM ALL: If all other external bays have confirmed the reservation,
the input is set with a logical 1 signal.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 229 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input GRANT FROM ANY: If at least one external bay still indicates a confirmation of a
previous reservation, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.

Input GRANT VALID: If all reservation confirmations are valid after cyclic actuation by
the interbay bus, the input is set with a logical 1 signal.

Input EXT:RES.REQ.: If a reservation request from an other bay is present, the input
is set with a logical 1 signal.

Input EXT.REQ.VALID: If the external request is valid, the input is set with a logical 1
signal.

Input BLOCK: If all reservations, inclusively the on going reservation shall be blocked,
the input is set with a logical 1 signal.

Input OVERRIDE: If the mechanism of the reservation is set out of order, the input is
set with a logical 1 signal. All reservation requests, internally and externally will be
granted.

Output RES.GRANT.i (i = 1 … 8): If reservation of the assigned switching

device is granted, the output becomes logical 1.

Output EXT.RES.: If reservation of the assigned switching device is granted, the

output becomes logical 1.

Output EXT.GRANT.: To confirm the related external bays, that this bay is already
prepared for executing the reservation request, the output becomes logical 1.

Output RESERVED: To indicate the reservation status of this bay, the output becomes
logical 1.

Configuration
The following subsection describes several configuration dialogs. In all dialogs you
can reach the Buttons OK or Cancel.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.
Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog win-
dow is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 230 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

General

Figure 210: Configuration dialog function block bay reserve

No parameter is set here!

Information about Pins

Figure 211: Information dialog Pins, function block bay reserve

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is
an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 231 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

4.4.19.8 Switch Authority Allocation

Figure 212: Function block bay switch authority allocation

Function
This function block is used to check and verify the switch authority allocation of all the
switching devices installed in the bay. Without this function block the status of the
electronic key on the HMI Control Unit is valid. When this function block is applied,
the status of the electronic key can be overridden, if desired, and the status of the
elctronic key can be used as input to this function block in order to extend the
definition for the allocation of the switch authority.

Connection
Input VALID: Logical 1 signal makes the status of the electronic key on the HMI
Control Unit valid

Input OFF: Logical 1 signal from an external key will block the control function of the
HMI Control Unit.

Input LCU KEY LOCAL: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope coming from the function
block key status of the electronic key on the HMI Control Unit to activate the local
control status.

Input LCU KEY REMOTE: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope coming from the function
block key status of the electronic key on the HMI Control Unit to activate the remote
control status.

Input STATION LOCAL: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope will enable the local control
of the station.

Input STATION REMOTE: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope will change the station
control to remote control.

Input STATION KEY LOCAL: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope advises that the
station key is set to local.

Input STATION KEY REMOTE: Logical 1 signal or its rising slope advis that the station
key is set to remote.

Input FORCE VALID: Set with logical 1 signal if the the status of the electronic keys is
ignored and the HMI Control Unit is set to remote control.

Output VALID : Logical 1 signal is present if the input signal is valid.

Output OFF : Logical 1 signal blocks the control function of the HMI Control Unit.

Output LOCAL : Only control commands from the HMI Control Unit will be executed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 232 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Output STATION : Only control commands from Station Control Unit will be executed.

Output REMOTE : Only control commands from remote control will be executed.

General

Figure 213: Configuration dialog function block switch authority allocation

No parameter is to be set here!

Information about Pins

Figure 214: Information dialog Pins, function block switch authority allocation

A list of connections on the function block can be seen and information about the wire
number connected to the pin can be read. There is also information whether the pin is

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 233 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

an input or output of the function block. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) or 2
(on one output) appear if the function block still has no connections made.

4.4.20 Miscallaneous objects

The subsections contain the descriptions of the function blocks that are available via
the menu Drawing Menu/Insert/Miscellaneous Objects.

4.4.20.1 Operating hours

Figure 215: Function block operating hours

Function
This function block counts the operating hours as long as there is a logical 1 at its
input. A number of operating hours can be set as the start value.
If an operating hours counter function block is implemented, the internal operating
hours counter counts only the hours for which the REF542plus is connected to the
auxiliary voltage. The number of operating hours is shown on the HMI of the
REF542plus LCD screen in the operational measured values ring menu. Here the
count of the internal counter or of the operating hours counter function block, if
activated, is used.

Note Only one operating hours counter function block may be used in the
application.

Typical application
The operating hours of any equipment can be recorded.
Connections:
Input left: If this input is set with logical 1, the operating hours count will begin.

Configuration

Figure 216: Configuration dialog function block operating hours counter

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 234 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Input field operating hours: Input of the factor multiplied by 1000 that sets the
initial value of the operating hours counter.
Setting range: 0…9 (increment: 0.001)
Default: 0.000

Information field pins: List of connections on the function block with adjacent
connection number. The connection numbers 1 (on one input) and 2 (on one output)
appear if the function block still has no connections made.

Button OK: All settings are saved in the configuration program. The dialog window is
closed.

Button Cancel: Settings are not saved in the configuration program. The dialog
window is closed.

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 235 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

5 Technical data
5.1 Analog input channels
5.1.1 With current and voltage transformer:
Rated current In 1A or 5A
Rated voltage Un 100V / √3 or 100V (also suitable for 110V)
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Thermal load capacity
Current path 4 In continuous,
100 In for 1s,
250 In (peak value) dynamic

Voltage path 2 Un / √3 continuous.

Consumption
Current path ≤ 0,1 VA with In
Voltage path ≤ 0,25 VA with Un

5.1.2 With current and voltage sensor

Rated current In 150 mV (RMS)
Rated voltage Un 2V (RMS)
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz / 60 Hz

5.2 Binary inputs and outputs

Each binary I/O board has the following number of inputs and outputs:

5.2.1 With mechanical relays

14 inputs for auxiliary voltage
20 to 90 V DC (threshold 14 V DC)
80 to 250 V DC (threshold 50 V DC)
Each input has a fixed filter time of 1 ms and can be extended by corresponding
configuration.
5 power outputs
Maximal Operation voltage 250V AC/DC
Make current 20 A
Load current 12 A
Breaking capacity 300W
Operation time 9 ms
2 signal outputs and 1 Watchdog - output
Operation voltage 250V AC/DC
Load current 2 A
Operation time 5 ms
1 Static output
Maximal Operation voltage 250V AC/DC
Operation time 1 ms
1 switch circuit monitoring

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 236 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

5.2.2 With static outputs

14 inputs for auxiliary voltage
48 to 265 V DC (Threshold 35 V DC)
Each input has a fixed filter time of 1 ms and can be extended by corresponding
configuration.
2 power outputs
Operation voltage 48 to 265V DC
Make current 70 A for t ≤ 10 ms
Load current 12 A for t ≤ 30 s
Operation time 1 ms
4 power outputs
Operation voltage 48 to 265V DC
Make current 16 A for t ≤ 10 ms
Load current 10 A for t ≤ 30 s
Operation time 1 ms
2 Signal outputs and 1 Watchdog - output
Operation voltage 48 to 250V DC
Make current 0,3 A
Operation time 1 ms
1 switch circuit monitoring

5.3 Interface
5.3.1 HMI Control Unit
Optical interface to the Notebook PC (at the front)
Electrical isolated interface according to RS485 to the Central Unit (at the rear)

5.3.2 Central Unit:

Electrical isolated interface according to RS485 to the HMI
Electrical interface according to RS232 for updating the firmware
Optical interface IRIG-B for real time synchronization with standard ST connector for
glass fiber

5.4 Analog output board (optional)

Four channel 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

5.5 Communication (optional)

SPABUS, electrical with RS232 interface or optical connector snap-in type for plastic
or standard ST type for glass fiber
LON (according to LAG 1.4), optical with standard ST connector for glass fiber
IEC 60870-5-103 with extension according to VDEW for controlling, optical with
standard ST connector for glass fiber
Dual MODBUS RTU, electrical with two RS 485 interfaces or optical with two
standard ST connector for glass fiber

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 237 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

5.6 Power supply

5.6.1 Central Unit
Rated voltage 48 to 220 VDC (-15%, +10%) or selectable
110 VDC (-15%, +10%) respectively,
220 VDC (-15%, +10%).
Power consumption ≤ 18 W
Inrush current ≤ 10 A peak value

5.6.2 HMI Control Unit

Rated voltage: 48 to 110 VDC (-15%, +10%) or
110 to 220 VDC (-15%, +10%)
Power consumption ≤6W

5.7 Temperature range

Operation -5 ... + 55°C
Transport and storing -20 ... +70°C

5.8 Degree of protection

5.8.1 Central Unit
Housing IP20

5.8.2 HMI Control Unit

Front IP 54
Rear IP 22

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 238 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

6 Type test
All relevant tests according to the standard IEC 60255, EN 61000 and also to the new
product standard EN 50263

6.1 EMC
Interference suppression according to EN 55022 respectively. IEC CISPR 11, Group1
Immunity to electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2, level 3
Immunity to radiated electromagnetic energy according to IEC 61000-4-3, level 3
Electrical fast transient or burst according to IEC 61000-4-4, level 3
Surge immunity tests according to IEC 61000-4-5, level 3
Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields according to
IEC 61000-4-6, level 3
Power frequency magnetic field immunity according to IEC 61000-4-8, level 5
Pulse magnetic field immunity according to IEC 61000-4-9, level 5
Damped oscillatory magnetic field immunity according to IEC 61000-4-10, level 5
Oscillatory waves immunity according to IEC 61000-4-12, level 3
Oscillatory waves immunity in the range from 0 to 150 kHz according to IEC 61000-4-
16, level 3
Ripple on DC input power port immunity according to IEC 61000-4-17, level 3
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on DC input power ports
according to IEC 61000-4-29, 50 ms.

6.2 Insulation
Voltage test according to IEC 60255-5 with 2kV RMS, 50 Hz during 1Min
Impulse voltage withstand test according to IEC 60255-5 with 5 kV 1,2/50 µs.

6.3 Mechanical robustness

Vibration test according to IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response and withstand test according to IEC 60068-2-2
Seismic test according to IEC 60068-2-30

6.4 Climatic conditions

Cold test according to IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat test according to IEC 60068-2-2
Damp Heat and Cycling test according to IEC 60068-2-30

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 239 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

7 Connection Diagram
7.1 Connector Plate
REF542plus Connector Plate for

REF542plus Connector Plate for

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 240 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

REF542plus Connector Plate for

Power Supply Connection for HMI Control Unit

7.2 HMI

- X10: Power Supply

- X20: RS 485 to Central Unit

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 241 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

7.3 REF542plus with mechanical binary I/O

Example of REF542plus base version with one mechanical binary I/O version 3.
Extension up to two additional mechanical binary I/O version 3 possible. Other
configurations of the analog input board available, e.g mixed configuration for
transformer and sensor connection.
Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO02.

-X10: 1 2 3
-X80:
5A + -
14
1A
15 T1
AI 01 DC
13
5A
11 DC
1A
12 T2
AI 02
10
5A
08
1A
09 T3 REF542plus
AI 03
07 Base version with
100/110V
24 binary I/O version 3
AI 04 T4
23
100/110V
20
AI 05 T5
19
100/110V
18
AI 06 T6
17
5A
05
1A
06 T7
AI 07
04

-X21:
-X20:
+ +
d02 z02
- BI01 BO01
z02 z04
+ d02
d04 -
- BI02 d04
z04
+
+ z06
d06 BO02
- BI03 z08
z06 -
+ d06
d08 d08
- BI04
z08 d10
+ BO03
d10 d12
- BI05
z10 z10
+ z12
d12
- BI06 d14
z12
BO04
+ d16
d14
- BI07 z14
z14
+ z16
d16
- BI08 d18
z16 BO05
d20
+
d18 d22
- BI09 BO06
z18 z18
+
d20 z20
- BI10
z20 z22
+ d24
d22
- BI11 z24
z22
BO07
+ z26
d24
- BI12 z28
z24
+ d26
d26 BO08
- BI13 d28
z26
+ d30
d28
- BI14 WD1 z30
z28
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 242 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Extension with second additional mechanical binary I/O version 3

Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO 10

-X30: -X31:
+
d02
- BI15 z02
z02 BO09
+ z04
d04 d02
- BI16
z04 d04
+ +
d06 z06
- BI17 BO10
z06 z08
+ -
d08 d06
- BI18
z08 d08
+ d10
d10 BO11
- BI19 d12
z10
+ z10
d12
- BI20 z12
z12
d14
+ BO12
d14 d16
- BI21
z14 z14
+
d16 z16
- BI22
z16 d18
+ BO13
d18 d20
- BI23 d22
z18
BO14
+ z18
d20
- BI24 z20
z20
+ z22
d22
- BI25 d24
z22
z24
+ BO15
d24 z26
- BI26
z24
z28
+
d26 d26
- BI27 BO16
z26 d28
+
d28 d30
- BI28
z28 WD2 z30
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 243 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Extension with third additional mechanical binary I/O version 3

Note: Please connect the right polarity on BO 18

-X40: -X41:
+
d02
- BI29 z02
z02 BO17
+ z04
d04 d02
- BI30
z04 d04
+ +
d06 z06
- BI31 BO18
z06 z08
+ -
d08 d06
- BI32
z08 d08
+ d10
d10 BO19
- BI33 d12
z10
+ z10
d12
- BI34 z12
z12
d14
+ BO20
d14 d16
- BI35
z14 z14
+
d16 z16
- BI36
z16 d18
+ BO21
d18 d20
- BI37 d22
z18
BO22
+ z18
d20
- BI38 z20
z20
+ z22
d22
- BI39 d24
z22
z24
+ BO23
d24 z26
- BI40
z24
z28
+
d26 d26
- BI41 BO24
z26 d28
+
d28 d30
- BI42
z28 WD3 z30
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 244 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

7.4 REF542plus with solid state binary I/O

Example of REF542plus base version for sensor connection with one solid state
binary I/O version 3. Extension up to two additional solid state binary I/O possible.
Other configuration of the analog input board available, e.g mixed configuration for
transformers and sensors connection.
Note: Please connect the right polarity

-X10: 1 2 3
+ -
A
-X81: D Sensor 1
DC
A Sensor 2
-X82: D
DC
A Sensor 3
-X83: D
A Sensor 4
-X84: D REF542plus
A Base version with
-X85: D Sensor 5
sensor and
A Sensor 6 solid state binary I/O
-X86: D
A Sensor 7
-X87: D
A Sensor 8
-X88: D

-X20: -X21:
+
d02
- BI01
z02
+
d04
- BI02 +
z04 d02
+ BO01
d06 d04
- BI03
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI04
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI05 +
z10 d06
+ BO02
d12 d08
- BI06
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI07 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI08 BO07
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI09 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI10 BO03
z20 d20
BO05
+ d22
d22 BO04 +
- BI11 z20
z22 BO06 +
+ z22
d24
- BI12 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO08
d26 z26
- BI13 +
z26 z28
+ BO09
d28 d28
- BI14 +
z28 d30
WD1
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 245 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Extension with secondsolid state binary I/O.

Note: Please connect the right polarity

-X30: -X31:
+
d02
- BI15
z02
+
d04
- BI16 +
z04 d02
+ BO10
d06 d04
- BI17
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI18
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI19 +
z10 d06
+ BO11
d12 d08
- BI20
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI21 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI22 BO16
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI23 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI24 BO12
z20 d20
BO14
+ d22
d22 BO13 +
- BI25 z20
z22 BO20 +
+ z22
d24
- BI26 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO17
d26 z26
- BI27 +
z26 z28
+ BO18
d28 d28
- BI28 +
z28 d30
WD2
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 246 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Extension with third additional solid state binary I/O

Note: Please connect the right polarity

-X40: -X41:
+
d02
- BI29
z02
+
d04
- BI30 +
z04 d02
+ BO20
d06 d04
- BI31
z06
+ -
d08 z02
- BI32
z08 z04
+
d10
- BI33 +
z10 d06
+ BO20
d12 d08
- BI34
z12
-
+ z06
d14
- BI35 z08
z14
+ +
d16 d10
- BI36 BO25
z16 d12
+ -
d18 z10
- BI37 z12
z18
+ +
d20 d18
- BI38 BO21
z20 d20
BO23
+ d22
d22 BO22 +
- BI39 z20
z22 BO24 +
+ z22
d24
- BI40 z18
z24 +
d24
+ BO26
d26 z26
- BI41 +
z26 z28
+ BO27
d28 d28
- BI42 +
z28 d30
WD3
z32

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 247 / 248

 REF 542 plus switchbay protection and control unit
Manual part 2: Engineering and Technical References

Product information:
Technical Marketing
ABB Calor Emag Mittelspannung GmbH
Oberhausener Str. 33
D-40472 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0) 2102 12 1046
Fax:: +49 (0) 2102 12 1916
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.abb.de/calor

1VTA100003-Rev.2, en PTVM, 22.10.02 Reference to the configuration software 248 / 248